JP2010115366A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing excitement and enjoyment of a game from decreasing by suitably achieving the control of several kinds of light-emitting members. <P>SOLUTION: While a tone control IC 3200b is made to control LEDs mounted on respective decoration boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 and a door frame decoration lamp 3124 provided for game board and door frame decoration by outputting a door frame side lighting/flickering command, a game board side lighting/flickering command, a tone lighting command and an impression start command to a lamp drive board 3200 by a peripheral control board 3100, an LED mounted on a stage decoration board 2012 as a jackpot establishment notifying means is directly controlled. Thus, even when an abnormal state occurs, it is quickly returned to a normal state, and the reliability of the LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 is improved. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning cylinder type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game is played by driving a game ball into a game area formed on the front surface of the game board, and lottery is performed with the acceptance of the game ball at a start opening provided in the game area. At the same time, a plurality of symbol strings made up of numbers, symbols, and the like are displayed in a variable manner, and the variable display is stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop symbol according to the lottery result. When the lottery result is a big hit, it is notified that it is a big hit by a combination of stop symbols of variable display, and a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

  A plurality of types of light emitting members are arranged in the game board and the main body portion of the gaming machine to which the game board is mounted, and the plurality of types of light emitting members are used for predetermined light emission in connection with the variable display of the symbol sequence executed by the display device. By turning on or blinking in color, the effect of changing display is enhanced, and the entertainment is enhanced.

In such a gaming machine, a CPU mounted on a lamp control board that controls the light emission modes of a plurality of types of light emitting members provided in the gaming machine based on a control command from a main control board that controls the entire gaming machine, By periodically outputting a lighting signal and a light-off signal to the drive circuit, and controlling to periodically apply and stop applying the pulsating voltage to the light emitting member, the light-on signal and the light-off signal are generated at a constant control cycle. Enables gradation control in which the brightness of the light-emitting member gradually increases or decreases just by outputting, and performs uniform lighting and blinking by a plurality of types of light-emitting members by controlling the light emission modes of a plurality of types of light-emitting members at once. The thing is proposed (patent document 1).
JP 2007-7164 A

  However, in the case where the light emission modes of a plurality of types of light emitting members are collectively controlled by the drive circuit as in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, noise or the like increases as the number of light emitting members to be collectively controlled increases. The risk of erroneous lighting due to increases. And, when erroneous lighting occurs, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest by suitably realizing control of a plurality of types of light emitting members.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

According to the first aspect of the present invention, a plurality of types can be selected based on the establishment of predetermined start conditions (accepting game balls to the first start port 1504 and the stage start port 2220, accepting game balls to the second start port 1506). A display device (first special symbol display 1802 and second special symbol display 1804) for variably displaying symbol information (special symbol) and displaying the display result;
Profit grant determination means (mounted on the main control board 1350) for determining whether or not to control to a profit grant state (special advantageous game state) for giving a predetermined profit (prize ball) to the player based on the establishment of the start condition. The CPU 3002 to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on a special random number),
In a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) that derives and displays a specific display result (special display result of a special symbol) on the display device when it is determined that the profit grant determination unit controls the profit grant state.
Game control means (main control unit) that includes the profit grant determination unit and controls the progress of the game including display control of the display device and transmits a control command according to the progress state according to the determination result of the profit grant determination unit. CPU 3002) mounted on control board 1350,
In response to a control command from the game control means, a plurality of types of light emitting members (LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010, and 2012) installed in the gaming machine are displayed in the display contents of the display device. Production control means (CPU 3102 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100) for controlling the production of the game including the control to emit light in association,
The production control means includes
The control process (main process (32 ms steady process)) for controlling the effect of the game is executed periodically (every 32 ms),
When controlling light emission of a specific light-emitting member (LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012) among the plurality of types of light-emitting members in accordance with a control process for controlling the effect of the game, the specific light-emitting member The specific light emitting member is directly controlled by outputting a drive signal to the control unit, and the control signal is output to the specific light emitting member and the control process for controlling the effect of the game is executed. Update at intervals less than or equal to
Non-specific light-emitting members other than the specific light-emitting members (LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010) among the plurality of types of light-emitting members according to the control process for controlling the effect of the game ) Is controlled by transmitting a light emission command indicating a light emission mode to a light emission control means (gradation control IC 3200b mounted on the lamp driving substrate 3200) for controlling light emission of the non-specific light emitting member. Indirectly controlling the non-specific light emitting member by causing the control means to output a drive signal to the non-specific light emitting member,
In order to update the drive signal output to the specific light emitting member at an interval equal to or shorter than an execution interval of a control process for controlling the game effect (an interval of 32 ms or less) and to control the game effect When the control process is not executed (remaining time of the main process), the light emission control state of the non-specific light emitting member by the light emission control means is determined (inspecting each control register of the control register group 3200bs) If the light emission control state is different from the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command, the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command is corrected (abnormal data (door frame in each control register of the control register group 3200bs)). Side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, and application start command. Characterized in rewrite) the normal data if it is different data) stored in the pattern.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a plurality of types of light-emitting members are emitted in association with the display contents of the display device that variably displays a plurality of types of symbol information and derives and displays a display result based on the establishment of the start condition. In order to control, the display effect can be enhanced and the symbol information can be variably displayed on the display device. In addition to the game control means for controlling the progress of the game, the effect control means for controlling the effect of the game including the control of a plurality of types of light emitting members is provided, so that the processing burden on the game control means can be reduced.
Furthermore, when a plurality of light emitting members are classified into a specific light emitting member and a non-specific light emitting member, and a specific light emitting member is controlled to emit light according to a control process for controlling the game effect, When the non-specific light-emitting member is controlled to emit light according to the control process for controlling the light-emitting member directly by the effect control means and controlling the game effect, the non-specific light-emitting member is indirectly controlled by the effect control means. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately control a plurality of light emitting members according to their classification, for example, to directly control a specific light emitting member having a specific meaning, thereby preventing erroneous lighting due to generation of noise or the like. Thus, the reliability can be improved, and the decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.
Further, the effect control means periodically executes control processing for controlling the game effect, and outputs to a specific light emitting member at an interval equal to or less than the execution interval of the control process for controlling the game effect. In order to update the drive signal, for example, even when a specific light-emitting member having a specific meaning is erroneously turned on due to noise or the like, it can be quickly corrected to a normal light emission mode. Thereby, the reliability of the light emission by a specific light emitting member can be improved, and the fall of game entertainment can be suppressed.
Also, when the effect control means is not executing the control process for controlling the game effect, the light emission control state of the non-specific light emitting member is determined and the light emission control state is different from the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command Is corrected to the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command, so that erroneous lighting due to generation of noise or the like can be suppressed. Moreover, since it is possible to improve not only the specific light emitting member having a specific meaning but also the reliability of a non-specific light emitting member not having a specific meaning, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  According to the present invention, when a plurality of light-emitting members are classified into a specific light-emitting member and a non-specific light-emitting member, and a specific light-emitting member is controlled to emit light in accordance with a control process for controlling a game effect. When the non-specific light emitting member is controlled to emit light according to the control process for controlling the production effect directly by the production control means, the production control means indirectly controls the It is possible to appropriately control the light emitting members according to the classification, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

[Overall structure of pachinko machines]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1.

  1 to 8, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. The player can visually recognize the main body frame 3 (to which the game board 4 is detachably mounted) and a game area 605 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed and into which a ball is driven. The door frame 5 includes a gaming window 101 and a tray unit 300 that is disposed below the gaming window 101 and stores a ball to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 7) of the main body frame 3 is detachable. Is provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and a handle device 460 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 460 that is conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , E-E sectional view (D).

  9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment is a connection for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the member 19. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the present embodiment correspond to the horizontal frame of the present invention, and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 of the present example correspond to the vertical frame of the present invention. Yes.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are attached with a plurality of (two in the case of illustration) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the case of illustration) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the case of illustration) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 which are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the side outside). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 10 are fixed by fixing with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the illustrated case. A lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 23) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. For this reason, the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be secured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 12) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 is lowered one step is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13 (B) to (D), the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is connected. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed on the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove portion 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the concave portion 30 (side) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 is inserted. The recess 30 of the frame plate 13 is formed with a display).

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above is provided with a hanging piece 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Further, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame part 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 at the upper part thereof, and closing at the lower part thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 with the fixing screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing projections 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 67) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ), And as will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it to one side, the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing projections 38, 41 are engaged with each other. The main frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by being uncoupled.

  The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing protrusion 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. The attachment protrusion 16 is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure that pivotally supports the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, the main frame 3 is attached along the upper surface of one side of the upper support fitting 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also functions to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 25) of an upper shaft support 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange hole 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 26) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotably supported in a freely openable / closable manner.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support metal fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53. 31 is fixed with a fixing screw 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12, and connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support bracket 45. Yes.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical abutting piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connection member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the left and right sides of the connection member 19 that are lowered by one step in the groove portion 29 when the connection member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and a handle is provided on one side (open side) of the plate unit 300. An operation handle portion 461 of the device 460 is fixed in a projecting manner. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101. A joint unit 480, a mounting base 280, and a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461 are attached to the back surface of the frame. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, the more detailed structure of each said structural member which comprises the doorplate 5 is demonstrated.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the lower side of the gaming window 101 is It is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is mounted with the gaming board 4 having larger dimensions in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction than the conventional one, so the vertical dimension and the horizontal dimension of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from that generally known in the art.

  On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 penetrates is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at an adjacent position on the opening side of the lid opening 105, and Further, a lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 1010 to pass therethrough is opened closer to the open side.

  Also, a joint unit mounting recess 107 for attaching the joint unit 480 is formed on the back side of the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104, and glass is formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side of the lower plate-like portion. An attachment receiving piece (not shown) for engaging the engaging protrusion 255 of the unit 250 is formed, and an attachment elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is attached to the side of the engagement receiving piece. An opening 110 is formed. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted forward into a guide hole 456 (see FIG. 16) of the dish unit 300 described later. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward. As described later, the door frame protruding piece 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 formed in the main body frame 3 Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

  In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for mounting the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge-shaped cross section in which the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulge portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inner side of the gaming window 101.

  By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. An opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portion of the upper lens cover portion 151, and the front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. The side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are similar to the upper lens cover portion 151 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The distance between the side cold cathode fluorescent tube formed in a straight line and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is smaller than that of the lens cover 151 and is formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole. Is formed to be close.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the front periphery of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed, and if the protruding amount is too large, there is a possibility that the operation at the time of opening may be hindered. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but is only visible as a spotted pattern of strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the game board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration, a decoration effect not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines can be achieved. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, light should diffuse and illuminate the entire area of the lens cover with little intensity even if scattered light sources such as LEDs are used. Can do.

  Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the upper left and right and the lower left and right of the lens cover 150 are balanced. To be installed to give Note that the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the periphery thereof is light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only the speaker is conventionally arranged and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed, so the light decoration around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 has a spotted impression. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before explaining the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay terminal plate 290, and the handle device 460 attached to the back side of the door frame main body 100. Will be described sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper reinforcement sheet metal 211 attached along the upper side rear surface of the door frame main body 100 and the shaft support side side rear surface of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached along the open-side side rear surface of the door frame main body 100, and a lower-side reinforcing metal sheet attached along the lower-side rear surface of the game window 101 of the door frame main body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 ( And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width of the door frame body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the lower bending protrusion piece 229 and the both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bending protrusion pieces 230 bent backward, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent protrusion 231 that extends in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form an uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, so that intrusion of illegal tools from below is somewhat prevented. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

  The vertical bent protrusion 231 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later, and when the glass unit 250 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 In addition, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protruding piece 231 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 261 formed along the substantially outer periphery in the width direction of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 (see FIG. 17). ). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is constituted by adhering two glass plates 262 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate (with a hot melt adhesive). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 and is provided with a crime prevention function that prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4, mainly FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 270 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 272 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 with the crime prevention cover 270 attached, and U-shaped at the lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a protruding manner is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. In the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the pre-crime projection piece 272 faces the lower rear surface of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. In addition, the post-crime projection piece 274 and the post-crime end edge projection piece 275 are in a state of protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime prevention projection piece 274 on the shaft support side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces each other, but the half on the open side of the post-crime projecting piece 274 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 30). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower front direction of the security cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the pre-crime projection pieces 272 and the unit frame 251 even if an unauthorized device is attempted to enter from the lower side of the glass unit 250. The anti-crime piece 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component member 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 270. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projections 608 and the rear end projections 275. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4 by the superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime projection piece 274.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 223 and 225 of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side on the open side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 274 can further prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear-end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or back feeding the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4. For this reason, a ball flight guide surface 286 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 for attaching the ball feed unit 287 is formed in the lower part of the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286.

  The ball feed unit 287 attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to the reciprocal movement difference of a ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls at the lower end of the guide passage portion of the dish unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 by the swinging operation. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed that is erected vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

  Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay terminal board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting base 280, and a relay board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay terminal plate 290 is provided. Installed. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 290 is an electrical component or electrical component (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation handle 461, ball rental unit 327, operation button unit provided on the door frame 5. 329, etc.) are integrated and connected, and the wiring from the frame decoration relay terminal plate 290 is connected to the back surface of the main body frame 3 through the door relay board 1102 etc. incorporated in the board unit 1100, etc. 3200.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an external appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340, and facing the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

  The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. The ball lending unit 327 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation button unit 329 at the front center on the upper surface. The operation button unit 329 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) push buttons 330 a, 330 b, and 330 c, and the plurality of operation buttons 330 is a liquid crystal provided on the game board 4. The game device is operated when a player participates in game content performed on the display device 640 or the like.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is provided with a first ball extraction button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301, and a second part of the second ball extraction link unit is formed at the lower center of the unit frame 301. A two-ball removal button 421 is arranged. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball.

  In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 57), the payout operation is stopped, or the ballistic operation is stopped and the game is not possible even though the game is being hit. In such a case, the second ball release button 421 By performing the operation, the ball that is being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit can be continued.

<Handle device>
Next, the handle device 460 attached to the lower part of the door frame 5 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19, and 20. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided on the main body frame 3. The handle device 460 is assembled to an operation handle portion 461 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and the back surface of the door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 461, and rotates according to the turning operation of the operation handle portion 461. And a joint unit 480 that cooperates with the rotating shaft 465 and changes the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 465 into a slide motion.

  Although not shown, the handle device 460 is a micro switch that is turned on when the operation handle portion 461 is rotated, and a single button that turns off the micro switch when the micro switch is turned on. And a touch sensor for detecting contact of the player with the operation handle portion 461 through conductive plating applied to the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle portion 461. Then, when the player rotates the operation handle portion 461, the microswitch is turned ON and the touch sensor detects contact, a later-described launch motor 695 (see FIG. 37) of the hitting ball launcher 650 is rotationally driven. It has become so. In addition, a cam formed in the shape of a sled ball is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465, and the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 moves in the left-right direction as the cam rotates. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the slide movement of the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball hitting device 650, and the tension of the biasing spring 684 (see FIG. 37) of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. By adjusting, the strength of the urging force of the hitting ball rod 687 can be adjusted to obtain the ball hitting force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 460 and the hit ball launching device 650 will be described in detail after the description of the hit ball launching device 650.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for discharging a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, a ball path unit 770, and a prize ball unit 800. (Corresponding to the payout unit of the present invention), the full unit 900, the locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 And various components such as a board unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 are collectively provided, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580. The main body frame 3 constructed by mounting the main body frame 500 on the main body frame main body 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 22 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 23 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. 24 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 26 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 27 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 29 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko gaming machine cut along the horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 portion). is there.

  In FIG. 21, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 25) for attaching and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are mounted on one side of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. Is substantially coplanar with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially coplanar with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 27). reference). Here, the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 27. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has an attachment portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 220 on the main body frame 3 is configured. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 25) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side portion of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side portion of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  The above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the most fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where cheating is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases, the support side is strong. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the distance between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is higher than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, it is not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed for passing through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 67) provided on a lock device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3 and jumping forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 is closed to the inner front surface of the panel positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side with the door frame 5 closed. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the front ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting projection 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement section 512 at substantially the center of the game board placement section 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 30) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the center portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the open end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 25) is fixed with screws. In addition, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 (see FIG. 30) which is the downstream end of 603.

  In addition, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 25) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixture mounting boss 517 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided to be rotatable around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512. The board fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixing tool 519 cannot be rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 41) that is associated with the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the connecting window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 37) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle through opening 521. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 22, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 25), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward above the above-described launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 73) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide protrusion 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and further, the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball extraction connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball extraction discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 25), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 57) of the full unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  The outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion described above, and is provided rearward from the first side wall 540. A second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 circumferentially provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 circumferentially provided rearward from the third side wall 542, The body frame 3 is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended backward with a step when viewed from the rear side, whereas the left side ( The open side is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 29) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 and may not be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 63) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Further, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth that is substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts and extends from the first side wall 540 rearward substantially in parallel to the first side wall 540 and accommodates a rearward protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the game board 4 It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the periphery of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 21), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the front surface of the upper rear wall 545 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface thereof. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to be a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 21), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear edge of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4, such gaming device 4 The rear protruding portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  In addition, the 1st side wall 540 in this embodiment is corresponded to the front side wall of this invention, and the 2nd side wall of this example, the 3rd side wall, and the 4th side wall are the back side wall of this invention. It corresponds.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. The middle and lower three places are opened, and the upper and lower door hook holes 549 are further above, below, and below, the lock locking holes 548 with which the locking protrusions 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged (see FIG. 22). Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 22) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided above the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only by the upper and middle screws, but also by a screw fixing portion 1003 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the locking device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed in the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. Then, when the mounting flange portion 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc protrusion 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 45) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the protruding pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is provided at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact from above.

  When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553, 554 and the locking protrusions 749, 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a clearance hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 24, vertical support walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the support-side rear wall 546 on the support-supporting rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the stand-up walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. Further, a prize ball guiding projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 50) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. In addition, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 50). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 52) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 52) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 52) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A relief hole 566 is formed to receive the end. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 25). The prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the engaging groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower end of the rear surface of the shaft supporting side rear wall 546 and is supported by the engaging protrusion 565 and the locking elastic claw 564. The rear wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546, and the cover body contact groove 567 of the cover body contact groove 567 is formed. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 28) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). By doing so, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. Further, the locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By passing through the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 28) and, for example, locking a padlock or the like to the locking protrusion 570, only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 21) are formed into which the door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (see FIG. 19) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 bent rearward. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described firing device mounting portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 having a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project. However, the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the firing device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are disposed to the open side is the back surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower back of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 for receiving the crime prevention protrusion 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 35. 30 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. FIG. 34 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 35 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  In FIG. 30, the game board 4 includes a game panel 600 made of wooden plywood and having a substantially square outer shape, and a front component member 601 attached to the front surface of the game panel 600 so as to surround the game area 605. Yes. On the surface of the gaming panel 600, various gaming devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the gaming area 605. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component member 601 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 600, and the front component member 601 is a hollow cavity that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 605. And the outer shape is formed in a shape along the outer shape of the gaming panel 600, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 that is connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at the start end portion thereof, and is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. A mouth 610 is formed. In addition, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stop portion 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Furthermore, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projecting piece 275 protruding from the security cover 270 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed, and overlaps with the axis of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. This prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  In addition, an out port 606 is provided at the lower center of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guiding passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 274, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap between the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. Thereby, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 34, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates the game board 4 in the front and rear direction is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). Is formed with a mounting notch 616 in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3 and the launch of the launch rail 515. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the portion, and a fastening linkage 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 35). ).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, unauthorized removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 is formed with a speaker notch 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive a rearward projecting portion of the speaker 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5. A notch 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for applying a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various gaming devices (for example, a general prize opening, a start opening, a big prize opening, etc.) provided in the game area 605 are aligned and guided downstream. Display control board box in which a liquid crystal display control board 3112 for controlling the display of a liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 74, etc.) as a display device arranged almost at the center of the game area 605 is housed on the back of the back box 621 A liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction that is relatively wider than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. And a drop port 629 (see FIG. 29) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 73) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  In addition, the board substrate holder 623 is connected to the main control board box 624 for storing the main control board 1350 for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186 provided in the board unit 1100 described later, a power supply board, and the like. And a relay terminal plate 625 for mounting. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 only by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joining guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 73). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 is a perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 39 is the hit ball launch in the state where the operation handle 461 is not operated. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 40 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball striking device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 461 is operated. 41 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view A-A in the front view (B). It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 that gives reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 that applies the biasing force that returns to the initial position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of the slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 that is fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, a flange portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the flange portion above the bearing cylinder 652. ing. The operating piece opening 657 abuts on a supply swing piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The operating piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on a mounting portion 660 protruding from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the operating piece opening 657. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the working piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner, and the upper side portion swings the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687, and the supply swing piece 289 swings to hit the ball. One hit ball that flows out from the supply port 288 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. In addition, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a projecting manner to slide the slide rod 677 to the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. Has been.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. For this reason, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 have the members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663 corresponding thereto. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 37, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, the shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. A connecting hole 674 having a shape is formed. The front surface above the connecting hole 674 is a contact portion 675 that contacts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Thus, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  In addition, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end) and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. The base plate 690 is provided with an operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and the front front surface of the base plate 690 is used to latch the locking ring 686 on the other end of the biasing spring 684. A spring locking portion 692 is provided in a projecting manner, and a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is provided in a projecting manner on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion to attach the motor. An anti-rotation cam 698 and a motor cam formed at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 integrally formed with an attachment portion in which an attachment fixing hole 699 for attachment to the boss 661 is formed. 697 is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698. The reverse rotation prevention cam 698 engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 39) fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. This prevents rotation in the opposite direction. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the opposite direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the striking ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor contact protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), the main structure of the ball hitting device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moved is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open as shown in FIG. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 492 of the joint unit 480 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 41B, one end side of the slide protrusion 492 on the inclined side 493 side contacts the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing the function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 38A in the state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connecting opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. 39, the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. Therefore, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 39) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 38A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 40) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the biasing spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the firing position is increased. The game is strongly ejected and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 656 of the slide member 710.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the ball striking device 650. The movement of the slide member 710 is performed by the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 described above. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 483 of the joint unit 480 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 464. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 of the handle device 460 is rotated, the slanting cam 466 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 465 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 480 483 slides and moves in one direction inside the storage body 481. For this reason, the slide protrusion 492 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 483 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 of the slide body 483 penetrates the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state in which one end side on the inclined side 493 side of the sliding protrusion 492 is in contact with the side wall in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Accordingly, when the slide protrusion 492 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the ball striking force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 464 of the handle device 460.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 460 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the sliding protrusion 492 of the handle device 460 is provided. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 492 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 460. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 492 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 460 and the ball striking device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide protrusion 492 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 that protrudes into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 492 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction. The slide protrusion 492 is smoothly inserted into the holding position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 492 is simply separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 492 is not limited. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 493 of the sliding protrusion 492 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 492 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 460 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can cooperate with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461. It is.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 24) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720, the main body frame 3 is provided. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the fourth side wall 543 project, and a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, is attached to the lower portion of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. The ball leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and mounted on the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 28, the prize ball tank 720 is stored through the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and it is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rearward projecting space in the peripheral part of the game board 4, so Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper portion of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without deformation of the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage unit 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank which provided an opening in a part of the inclined bottom surface as a discharge port as in the prior art, a ball collapse protrusion for eliminating a ball clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a structure in which clogging of balls is difficult to occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting portion of the gaming apparatus, and the award Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided outside the rear wall 722 is a unique effect not found in conventional prize ball tanks. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the sphere at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in a conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 43, or a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to the ball breaking projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize sphere tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced by the degree of sphere polymerization, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B, resulting in a clogged sphere. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the related art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 and it is possible to achieve an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 44 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 24) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted into the rail locking groove 553 from above on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. A hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 that is hooked from above into the rail locking groove 554 is provided in the center. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape with the upper surface open, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. In addition, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 22). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the middle downstream side of the tank rail member 740 is provided to be swingable. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the passages 742 in the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that hang down and flow down the respective passages 742 flow in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball presser plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been set to the first level by the ball leveling member 744 is forcibly set to the first level.

  Furthermore, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. Therefore, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed at the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
A ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the winning ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 51. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 49 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 50 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 51 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. 48 and 49, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat sink 841 and the unit sub plate 825 removed. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is referred to as the front surface). As shown in FIG. 46A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742, as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 is the main body. The winning ball guide protruding from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the pivot-side rear wall 546 is positioned away from the surfaces of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot-side rear wall 546 of the frame 3. The projection 561 bends the ball drop passage 772 in the front-rear direction so that the ball drop passage 772 is positioned close to the surface of the shaft-supporting rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 50, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed in a U-shape so as to be almost full of the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a cutout portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When the portion 772c no longer has a ball due to clogging or lack of the ball, the ball breakage detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 is inserted into a pin from the rear side of the ball path unit 770 when the ball breakage detecting piece 776 is difficult to swing due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when the sphere is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the sphere break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the sphere break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball passage unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop passage 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also formed in the passage unit mounting boss formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. 562. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 A projecting shaft 789 as a rotating shaft projecting from the tip of a support piece 788 extending from both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into a support projecting piece 787 serving as a shaft support projecting from both left and right ends of the connecting lid member 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. In addition, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by being closed, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 51B). The state shown in FIG. 51 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 51A) can be rotated. A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the open state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and as described later, the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 (FIG. 51). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable coupling lid member 786 is provided in the ball path unit 770 is that the prize ball unit 800 is easily detachably attached to the main body frame 3 as described later, and the detachable attachment lid member 786 is detachable. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Further, the ball that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . The vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Thereby, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball has fallen in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, that the ball supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has been cut (ball cut).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. 52 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 53 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 55 is a rear view for explaining the path and drive relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  52, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 that form a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and the unit base body. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of 801, a relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a gear provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface region) of the unit sub-plate 825. It comprises a group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to approximately the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both sides of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. The middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. In other words, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably mounted.

  The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the front end, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is provided with a bent passage wall 802. In this way, it can be easily and detachably attached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 are formed by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. The motor storage space 814 that stores the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 is disposed are formed in a very close positional relationship in the vertical direction. The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided sphere is guided to a ball outlet connecting passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided with a bar-like detachable button 822 provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 so as to be slidable in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In this engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 engage with each other, so that the upward movement of the winning ball unit 800 is not possible.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. is doing.

  The structure of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed.

  The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape. An engagement groove portion 828 that engages with the engagement protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection portion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fastening the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

  The relay board 830 attached to the relay board area 826 described above includes wiring from the above-mentioned payout ball detection sensor 812, payout motor 815, and sensor 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800, and a payout control board 1186 (described later). 25 and 72), a plurality of connectors are provided for this purpose, and a button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. And are drilled. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with a screw (not shown) to thereby fix the relay board 830 to the unit sub-unit. It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

  Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with the board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay substrate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. .

  As shown in FIG. 55, the tip of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotary shaft 808 is supported by being press-fitted into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 55, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with the rotation shaft 808 as a center. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projecting / receiving sensor 855 (rotation position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). It is. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 55, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 covering the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that projects from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that hangs and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be taken out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 disposed in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that transmits to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 has a ball passage (bent passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 formed in a single passage shape, thereby further increasing the number of balls. Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 55, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front part of the main body frame 3 from the lower relief motor relief opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side from the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivot support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 47, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824, the engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed downward while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. Then, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are disengaged from each other by moving to the front side, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 62. 56 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900. FIG. 58 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 59 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 60 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  The full unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 58, the full unit is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the ball in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 forms the above-described dish unit 300. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape with an open top surface, and a pair of axial projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semicircular that is pivotally supported by being fitted to the pivot projection 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 projects downward from the center of the bottom surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the number of payouts is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 to be described next when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted to and supported by the shaft projection 911. It has become.

  Further, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed outside the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of a switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 60, the foul ball passage 922 is bent so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 includes engagement pieces that are engaged with unit engagement grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching projection 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid body 926 is formed while a projection 924 is provided. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid body 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened in the passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, around the lid 926, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 projects downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 56, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the side guide passage 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The sphere colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and the front guide passage 920. From the exit 921 through the prize ball communication rod 451 to the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball inlet 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and merged with the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connecting rod 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 is a light projecting / receiving method as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection protrusion 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the conventional case because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 for guiding the foul ball joins the ball with a reduced momentum in the middle of the front guide passage 920 for paying out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 that is attached in the vertical direction along the rear side edge on the open side of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 71. 63 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 64 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing a latching structure of the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 66 is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 66 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 67 is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 67 is a side view (A) of the locking device 1000, a perspective view (B) viewed from the front side, and FIG. 68 is a perspective view (A) viewed from the back side of the locking device 1000. ) Are perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000. FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Is a front view for explaining the operation of the body frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 71 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The lock device 1000 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the main body, the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame cannot be illegally slid. The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, since the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is greatly increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the side walls 540 and the main body frame 3 are A mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be mounted on the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base body 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, rectangular hook penetration openings 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass are opened above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001, and on the closed side. In addition, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the middle and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 69) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. A locking projection 1004 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper end and middle portion of FIG.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 64). Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. can do. The locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 to a corresponding position with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) of the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear part are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  In addition, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed at each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed on the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet slots 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the rivet 1006 passes through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is provided projecting sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 are provided on a side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has a front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are formed in two upper and lower positions, and screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment board 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment board. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 and mounting holes 1013 and lock mounting pieces 1008 formed at two positions on the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Accordingly, the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps with the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and a second engaging protruding piece 1018 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is an inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 is in contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, and the first engaging protruding piece 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. Makes the first fraud prevention member 1023 swing around the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise direction in FIG. 71B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding on an outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restriction protruding piece 1031 is provided below the stopper piece portion 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. In addition, the first tamper preventing member 1023 and the second tamper preventing member 1032 are connected to each other by the spring 1035 in the restricting protruding piece 1031, and the second tamper preventing member 1032 is biased by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped body. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with the connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the spring locking hole 1036 has one end with a U-shaped base 1001 spring locking piece. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 15) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked with each other by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet slot among the rivet slots 1042 is formed. A guide protrusion 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the raising operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 guides the mutual sliding operation.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. A clearance notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to reliably engage the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 is in contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 is smooth and smooth. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the lower engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, and an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 41 provided on the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is passed through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip end portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the abutting portion 1067 abuts against the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 is smooth without any backlash. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While inserting into the hook hole 549, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding in the horizontal direction By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38, 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 70A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engagement protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push up and raise the door frame sliding rod 1040 against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hooked state of the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 70A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 227 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. Since the door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are again locked with each other, and the door frame is brought into contact with the upper end of the door frame. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the overall length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the longitudinal side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from there. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in a contact state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 becomes the fraud prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked on the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 also starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the illustrated clockwise direction, and moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 71 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the illegal tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 that is extremely thin in comparison with the lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, the main body is provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screwing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not closely contacting the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b closely contacting the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the board unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 72 and FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as viewed from the front side.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 22 and 24) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in the figure, for the frame made of synthetic resin. The board holder 1101 is configured by attaching various boards such as a door relay board, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay board. Of the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board. The auxiliary drawer relay board is attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Installed.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape. As shown in the drawing, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side, and although not shown, the inside of the wiring opening 1124 is omitted. A recess for the relay board for attaching the door relay board is formed. Attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outwardly from both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 22). As shown in FIG. 24, the attachment hole portion 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 73) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  In addition, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out-ball passage 1119 is formed widely on the upper side so as to correspond to the out-port 606 (see FIG. 31), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 22), and the drop-out port 629 (see FIG. 29). In addition, the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  The board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board. A rectangular connector opening for projecting outward is formed.

  The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. The box main body and the cover body are engaged with each other on one side, and are fixed to the other side by caulking with a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 24, and 28. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, a contact protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1283, the standing wall 1284, the contact protrusion 1285, and the reinforcing rib 1286 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment. Have the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are made to coincide with each other and fastened with screws (not shown), so that the cover body 1250 can fix the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

<Detailed configuration of game board>
The detailed configuration of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 74A is an enlarged front view showing a status indicator in the game board. FIG. 75 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally right front, and FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the diagonally left front. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from behind, and FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 79 is an enlarged perspective view showing the vicinity of the stage in FIG. Further, FIG. 80 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded view for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from an oblique rear. FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a player operates a control handle 461 to drive a game ball as a game medium. A frame-shaped front structural member 601 that partitions and forms the outer periphery of the gaming area 605, and a rear end of the gaming area 605 that is disposed on the rear side of the front structural member 601 so as to close the inside of the frame of the front structural member 601 A plate-shaped game panel 600 that can be formed, a frame-shaped center accessory 1400 that is attached to the approximate center of the game area 605 on the front side of the game panel 600, and an out side in the game area 605 below the center accessory 1400 An attacker unit 1500 disposed on the upper side of the mouth 606 and outside the game area 605 on the upper side of the attacker unit 1500 and on the lower left side of the center accessory 1400. , A state indicator 1800 that is arranged at the lower right of the front component 601 outside the game area 605 and can display a game state, and a back box 621 on the rear side of the game panel 600 A back unit 2000 that is attached to the rear unit 2000, a liquid crystal display device 640 that is detachably supported on the rear side of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000, and that can display a predetermined effect image, and a rear panel of the game panel 600 And a board substrate holder 623 which covers the lower part of the back unit 2000 and the back box 621 and which fixes the main control board box 624 to the rear side.

  Although the center structure 1400 in the game board 4 of this embodiment will be described in detail later, it is arranged at the approximate center in the game area 605, and the game ball can roll in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral lower surface of the frame. In addition, the role-side rolling surface 1402 that can be released into the game area 605 on the front side and the left outer periphery of the frame are opened toward the game area 605 so that game balls in the game area 605 can enter. And a gate outlet 1406 that opens toward the game area 605 below the gate entrance 1404 and from which the game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1404 is released, and enters the gate entrance 1404. The game ball is detected by the gate sensor 3012 (see FIG. 103) and then released from the gate outlet 1406 into the game area 605. Further, the center accessory 1400 includes a warp inlet 1410 disposed on the left outer periphery of the frame below the gate outlet 1406 and opening toward the game area 605, and a left inner side of the frame below the warp inlet 1410. And a warp outlet 1412 that opens to the periphery.

  The attacker unit 1500 in the game board 4 will be described in detail later, but as shown in the figure, the attacker unit 1500 is disposed below the role-side rolling surface 1402 in the center role 1400. Three general winning ports 1502 that are allowed to be received, a first start port 1504 that is arranged immediately below a predetermined position of the role-side rolling surface 1402 in the center role 1400 and that is capable of receiving game balls at all times, A game ball can be received in accordance with the result of a normal lottery that is placed under the start opening 1504 and entered by the gate sensor 3012 when the game ball enters the gate receiving port 1404 of the center accessory 1400. Alternatively, the second starting port 1506 that cannot be received, the large winning port 1510 that is disposed below the second starting port 1506 and opens in a rectangular shape, and the large winning port 1 10 substantially opening and closing piece 1512 capable of opening and closing plate of a rotatably axially supported by winning opening 1510 along the lower end of, and an attacker solenoid 1518 for opening and closing the opening and closing piece 1512.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, the back unit 2000 in the game board 4 comes into contact with the rear surface of the game panel 600 and can be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 600, and has substantially the same shape as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. A back unit base 2100 having an opening 2102, a stage member 2200 supported on the lower side and the front side of the opening 2102 in the back unit base 2100, and a swinging body supported on the right side and the front side of the opening 2102 in the back unit base 2100. A unit 2300, a traversing body unit 2500 disposed behind the stage member 2200 and the oscillating body unit 2300 and capable of closing the opening 2102 of the back unit base 2100; Opened box-shaped and the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear wall A back case 2150 having an opening 2152 having substantially the same shape as the display screen and attached to the back unit base 2100, and a peripheral control board box 2050 supported below the traversing body unit 2500 and behind the back unit base 2100. And mainly. The stage member 2200 in the back unit 2000 is provided with a stage start port 2220 at substantially the center in the left-right direction.

  In the game board 4 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 1410 of the center accessory 1400 are supplied from the warp outlet 1412 to the stage member 2200 of the back unit 2000. When the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 rolls on the stage member 2200 and is not received in the stage start port 2220, the game ball is discharged onto the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 of the center accessory 1400, An accessory is released into the game area 605 after rolling on the rolling surface 1402.

  In the game board 4 (pachinko machine 1) of this example, the general winning port 1502, the first starting port 1504, the second starting port 1506, the big winning port 1510 in the attacker unit 1500, and the stage starting port 2220 in the back unit 2000 are received. The received game balls are detected by a general winning port sensor 2110, a first start port sensor 2112, a second start port sensor 1522, a count sensor 1524, and a stage start port sensor 2114, respectively. Depending on the game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the pachinko machine 1, the game balls are received in the first start port 1502, the second start port 1504, and the stage start port 2220, and the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, and the stage start port. When detected by the sensor 2114, a predetermined special lottery result is drawn, and the open / close piece 1512 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery result (for example, “big hit”, “small hit”, etc.). The winning opening 1510 can be received.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 74, the status indicator 1800 in the game board 4 of the present example is disposed on the outer side of the game area 605 and below the front component member 601 on the right side of the out port 606. 1504 and the first special symbol display 1802 variably displayed when the game ball is received at the stage start port 2220, and the second special symbol variably displayed when the game ball is received at the second start port 1506 A normal symbol display 1806, a normal symbol display 1806, and a first special symbol display 1802 and a second special symbol display 1804 are displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters the gate entrance 1404. 1st special symbol memory number display 1 which displays the memory number which suspended the start of a variable display when a game ball is received in the 1st start port 1504 and the stage start port 2220 during 08, the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 display the number of memories for which the start of the variable display is suspended when a game ball is received at the second starting port 1506 during the variable display. Two special symbol memory number display unit 1810 and normal symbol display unit 1806 display normal memory number display unit 1812 that displays the memory number for which the start of variation display is suspended when a game ball enters gate entrance 1404 during variation display. And.

  The first special symbol indicator 1802 and the second special symbol indicator 1804 of the status indicator 1800 are each composed of a 7-segment LED, and the first start port 1502 and the stage start port 2220 are selected depending on the combination of the segments. , And a special lottery result by the start winning to the second start port 1504 is suggested. Further, the normal symbol display 1806 is configured by LEDs that can emit light in two colors (red and green in this example), and the normal lottery result that is drawn when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 is displayed. It is suggested by the emission color. When a game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 and the normal symbol display 1806 emits light in a color (for example, green) that suggests hitting, the pair of movable pieces 1508 that close the second starting port 1506 has a predetermined time (for example, , 0.5 seconds), and the game ball can be received at the second start port 1506 (winning is possible).

  The first special symbol memory number indicator 1808, the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, and the normal symbol memory number indicator 1812 are each composed of two LEDs, and combinations of lighting and blinking of each LED. Indicates the number of memories reserved (for example, a maximum of four).

  In addition to the first special symbol memory number indicator 1808 and the second special symbol memory number indicator 1810, the status indicator 1800 includes a first start port 1504, a stage start port 2220, and a second start port 1506. When the open / close piece 1512 that opens and closes the big prize opening 1510 of the attacker unit 1500 is “big hit” that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the special lottery result that is drawn based on the start winning of ) And a small hit indicator 1816 composed of one LED that lights up when the special lottery result is “small hit”. The round indicator 1814 includes three LEDs, and can display, for example, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, or “15R big hit” depending on the position of the LED to be lit. ing.

[Center character, attacker unit, and side member]
The configuration of the center accessory 1400, the attacker unit 1500, and the side member 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82A is a perspective view of the center accessory, the attacker unit, and the side member viewed from the front, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the center accessory, the attacker unit, and the side member viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is a side view of the center accessory as viewed from the direction of arrow A in FIG.

  First, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 1400 has a front portion 1400a that projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 600, and a plate that extends outward from the rear end of the front portion 1400a and contacts the front surface of the game panel 600. And a rear portion 1400c which is an outer periphery substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 600a in the game panel 600 and extends rearward from the flange portion 1400b and is inserted into the opening portion 600a. The game area 605 in FIG. This center accessory 1400 is formed in a frame shape as a whole, and visually recognizes an effect image displayed on the traversing body unit 2500 or the liquid crystal display device 640 in the back unit 2000 from the front (player side) through the frame. Be able to.

  The center accessory 1400 is provided with an accessory-side rolling surface 1402 on the inner peripheral lower surface in the frame of the front portion 1400a, in which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction and can be released to the front side. . This accessory-side rolling surface 1402 is formed such that both left and right ends are raised, and the embankment 1402a having a predetermined height disposed on the front end side except for the lowest position is the lowest. And a curved concave portion 1402b that extends in a fan shape in the left-right direction from the rear end toward the front end. When a game ball is supplied onto this accessory-side rolling surface 1402, it rolls in the left-right direction while being prevented from being released to the front side by the bank portion 1402a, and from the recess 1402b with a very high probability. It is released to the front side.

  Further, on the left outer periphery of the front portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400, there are a gate entrance 1404 that opens toward the game area 605 and allows a game ball in the game area 605 to enter, and below the gate entrance 1404. A gate outlet 1406 that opens into the game area 605, a gate passage 1408 that connects the gate inlet 1404 and the gate outlet 1406, and a gate that is disposed in the gate passage 1408 and that can detect a game ball that has entered the gate inlet 1404 A sensor and a warp inlet 1410 that opens toward the inside of the game area 605 below the gate outlet 1406 and into which a game ball can enter are provided. A game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1404 from within the game area 605 is detected by the gate sensor, and is then discharged from the gate exit 1406 into the game area 605 again through the gate passage 1408.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 includes a warp outlet 1412 that opens below the warp inlet 1410 and opens into the left inner peripheral frame of the rear portion 1400c, and a warp passage 1414 that connects the warp inlet 1410 and the warp outlet 1412. In addition. The game balls that have entered the warp inlet 1410 are discharged from the warp outlet 1412 through the warp passage 1414. By passing through the warp passage 1414, the game balls in the game area 605 are centered in the center role 1400. It can be moved into the frame.

  Further, on the upper outer periphery of the front portion 1400a of the center accessory 1400, a guide shelf 1416 inclined substantially linearly so as to have a lower left end on the left side from a substantially horizontal center, and on a right side from a substantially center in the left and right direction And an arc-shaped outer peripheral wall 1418 extending substantially along the outer periphery of the game area 605 to the lower end of the game area 605. When the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 605 by the player's operation flows down substantially left on the center in the left-right direction, the game ball is guided to the left side of the center accessory 1400 by the guide shelf 1416 and left on the center accessory 1400 The opportunity to flow down the game area 605 and enter the gate entrance 1404, the warp entrance 1410, etc. is obtained. On the other hand, when the game ball flows down to the outer peripheral wall 1418 on the substantially right side in the left-right direction, it passes between the outer peripheral wall 1418 and the outer periphery of the game area 605 and is guided to the lower end of the game area 605 at once. You can not enjoy the movement.

  As shown in the figure, a plurality of protrusions 1418a are provided at predetermined intervals on the outer peripheral wall 1418 of the center accessory 1400, and a game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral wall 1418 to the lower part of the outer peripheral wall 1418 is provided. A decelerating unit 1420 for decelerating the speed is provided. The speed reduction portion 1420 includes a transparent plate-like front plate 1420a that extends outward from the front end of the outer peripheral wall 1418 and is substantially fan-shaped along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral wall 1418. The outer peripheral wall 1418 and the flange portion 1400b form a flow path through which a game ball can pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the speed reduction portion 1420 has a protrusion extending in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral wall 1418 at a position facing the rear surface of the front plate 1420a and the front plate 1420a in the flange portion 1400b. A plurality of strips 1420 b are provided alternately along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral wall 1418. The game balls that have flowed down along the outer peripheral wall 1418 are brought into contact with the alternately arranged ridges 1420b by the reduction portion 1420, so that the flow formed by the outer peripheral wall 1418, the front plate 1420a, and the flange portion 1400b. It can flow down the road in a zigzag to reduce the flow speed. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral wall 1418 is decelerated by the speed reduction portion 1420 and enters the out port 606, and the game ball with momentum passes through the out port 606 and is the attacker unit. It is possible to prevent the 1500 or the side member 1600 from crashing into a portion protruding forward and being damaged.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the center accessory 1400 is arranged in the right frame portion and arranged in the center of the crescent-shaped main decorative body 1422 along the arc-shaped outer peripheral wall 1418, and is rotated in the approximate center of the upper frame portion. It further includes a petal-like rotating decorative body 1424 that is made possible. Although not shown in the figure, the main decorative body 1422 in the center accessory 1400 has a surface member 1422a on which a predetermined logo characterizing the concept of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed, and a rear surface member 1422a arranged on the rear surface. A main decorative board 3126 (see FIG. 104) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a lens member (not shown) that is disposed between the main decorative board 3126 and the surface member 1422a and diffuses light from the LEDs. The surface member 1422a of the main decorative body 1422 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately causing the LEDs on the main decorative board 3126 to emit light.

  The rotating ornament 1424 in the center accessory 1400 is formed in a petal shape and is rotatably supported around a shaft core extending in the front-rear direction, and the rotation axis of the petal ornament 1424a is rotated. It includes a petal motor 3128 to be driven (see FIG. 104) and a rotating body decoration substrate 1424b that is disposed on the rear side of the petal decoration body 1424a and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. The rotating decoration body 1424 is configured such that the petal decoration body 1424a is driven to rotate by the petal motor 3128 according to the game situation and the like, and the LED of the rotating body decoration board 1424b is appropriately made to emit light to thereby decorate the petals. The body 1424a can be decorated with light emission. Although not shown in detail, the rotating decorative body 1424 includes a motor gear that is rotationally driven by the petal motor, a driven gear that meshes with the motor gear, a pulley gear that has a driving pulley that rotates integrally with the driven gear, and a petal. A petal pulley that rotates integrally with the decorative body 1424a, and a belt that is wound around the driving pulley of the petal pulley and the pulley gear are provided. It is transmitted to the body 1424a.

  Further, the center accessory 1400 further includes a sub-decoration body 1426 disposed near the main decoration body 1422 on the lower side of the accessory-side rolling surface 1402. As shown in the figure, the sub-decoration body 1426 is an image of a bridge over a river. The sub-decoration body 1426 is arranged substantially along the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 and has a balustrade part 1426a simulating a balustrade of the bridge, and a balustrade part. 1426a, and a bill portion 1426b simulating a bill such as a flower card. The tag portion 1426b of the sub-decoration body 1426 includes a rectangular frame body 1426c, a white plate-like display portion 1426d that closes the inside of the frame body 1426c and has translucency, and a rear side of the display portion 1426d. An arc-shaped first partition wall 1426e disposed substantially at the center in the up-down direction and having a raised center in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical second partition wall 1426f disposed above the first partition wall 1426e are provided (FIG. 106). (See (a)). As will be described in detail later, the bill portion 1426b appropriately turns on the LED of the stage decoration substrate 2012 arranged on the rear side, thereby causing the display portion 1426d to display “no pattern”, “芒”, “芒 to moon”. The three types of symbols can be displayed.

  In addition, the center accessory 1400 is arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction and inside the right frame portion (main decoration body 1422), and can detect an object moving in the vertical direction within a predetermined range on the front surface of the game area 605. A longitudinal sensor 1428 is further provided. The longitudinal sensor 1428 emits detection light made up of invisible light such as infrared rays in a predetermined front direction, and a reflected light of the detection light emitted from the light emission part 1428a and disposed above the light emission part 1428a. And a light receiving portion 1428b capable of receiving light, and can detect a player's hand moving up and down within a predetermined range in front of the game area 605. For example, the longitudinal sensor 1428 enables the detection of the longitudinal sensor 1428 in a predetermined gaming state, and provides an effect image that prompts the liquid crystal display device 640 to move the hand up and down in front of the gaming area 605. This is an opportunity to perform a predetermined effect by detecting the hand moved by the player in front of the game area 605, so that the player can participate in the game effect and enhance the interest. It is to make.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the attacker unit 1500 includes a front portion 1500a that projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 600, and a plate that extends outward from the rear end of the front portion 1500a and contacts the front surface of the game panel 600. And a main body 1500c that protrudes rearward from the flange 1500b and can be inserted into a corresponding opening 600a in the game panel 600, and a role-side rolling surface 1402 of the center accessory 1400. Located on the underside. In the front portion 1500a of the attacker unit 1500, as described above, the three general winning holes 1502 in which the game balls can be received at all times, and the discharge balls 1420 in the center accessory 1400 are arranged immediately below the game balls. The first starting port 1504 that can be received, and a game ball that is arranged below the first starting port 1504 and enters the gate receiving port 1404 of the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the gate sensor, and is selected by lottery. According to the normal lottery result, a second start port 1506 that can accept or cannot accept game balls is provided.

  The attacker unit 1500 includes a pair of movable pieces 1508 whose upper ends are free ends on the left and right sides of the second start port 1506, and a position where the free ends of the pair of movable pieces 1508 are close to each other and away from each other. When the movable piece 1508 is in a substantially upright state (a state where the free ends are close to each other), a pair of movable pieces is provided. Due to 1508 and the first start port 1506, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 1506. On the other hand, when the upper ends (free ends) of the pair of movable pieces 1508 are separated from each other in a direction away from each other, the game ball can be received into the second start port 1506. Further, by expanding the pair of movable pieces 1508, it is possible to guide the game ball to the second starting port 1506 side by the movable piece 1508, and the probability of receiving the game ball with respect to the size of the second starting port 1506 Has become high.

  Also, the attacker unit 1500 is disposed below the second start opening 1506, and is supported by a large payout opening 1510 that is horizontally long and opened in a rectangular shape, and is rotatably supported substantially along the lower end of the big win opening 1510. A plate-shaped opening / closing piece 1512 capable of opening / closing the winning opening 1510 and an attacker solenoid 1518 (see FIG. 82B) for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 1512 are provided. The opening / closing piece 1512 is pivotally supported so that the lower side extending in the left-right direction is rotated about the rotation axis. When the opening / closing piece 1512 is in a substantially vertical state, the grand prize winning opening 1510 is closed, and the opening / closing piece is opened. By turning so that the upper side of 1512 moves forward, the big prize opening 1510 is opened, and the game ball flowing down by the back surface of the opening / closing piece 1512 can be guided to the big prize opening 1510 side. It can be done. It should be noted that the special winning opening 1510 is normally closed by the opening / closing piece 1512 and cannot be received.

  Further, the attacker unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of guide pieces 1514 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 to the center side of the game area 605. Although illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 1500 is provided with an attacker unit decoration board 3130 (see FIG. 104) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. The vicinity of 1502 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the attacker unit 1500 is provided with a guide rod 1520 for guiding the game balls received in the general winning opening 1502 and the first start opening 1504 to the back unit 2000 arranged on the rear side. The main body 1500c of the attacker unit 1500 includes a second start port sensor 1522 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 1506, and a count sensor 1524 that detects a game ball received in the big prize port 1510. The game balls received in the second start opening 1506 and the big prize opening 1510 are detected by the second start opening sensor 1522 and the count sensor 1524 and then released downward from the lower part of the main body 1500c. It is like that.

  Subsequently, as shown in the drawing, the side member 1600 includes a front portion 1600a that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 600, and a plate that extends outward from the rear end of the front portion 1600a and contacts the front surface of the game panel 600. And a rear portion 1600c that extends rearward from the flange portion 1600b and can be inserted into a predetermined opening 600a in the game panel 600, and is located on the left side of the center accessory 1400 in the game area 60. In addition, it is arranged on the upper side of the attacker unit 1500 substantially along the outer periphery of the game area 605. A front shelf 1600a of the side member 1600 is provided with a guide shelf 1602 capable of guiding the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 to the center side in the left-right direction. In addition, the side member 1600 is formed of a member that is partially translucent, and emits light by light from the LED mounted on the side decorative substrate 2010 provided in the back unit 2000 behind the side member 1600. It can be decorated.

[Previous components and game panel]
The configuration of the front component member 601 and the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 84A is a perspective view seen from the front in a state where the front structural member and the gaming panel are assembled, and FIG. 84B is a perspective view seen from the rear in the state where the front structural member and the gaming panel are assembled. is there.

  As described above, the front component member 601 in the game board 4 of the present example includes the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 that define the outer periphery of the game area 605 and guide the game ball in the game area 605. The game panel 600 is made of a wood plywood having a predetermined thickness, and includes a center opening 1400, an attacker unit 1500, and a through opening 600a through which the side member 1600 is inserted and fixed. These openings 600a have a shape substantially in line with the outer shape of the center accessory 1400 to be inserted and fixed. Note that a through opening 600 a is also formed at a position corresponding to the out port 606.

  A front component 601, a center accessory 1400, an attacker unit 1500, and a side member 1600 are attached to the front surface of the game panel 600. In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 600 at a position corresponding to the game area 605. Further, a rear unit 2000 and a board substrate holder 623 are attached to the rear surface of the game panel 600.

[Back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 2000 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85 is a front view of the back unit. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front after disassembling each main configuration, and FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. 87 as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view in which each member attached to the back unit base in the back unit is exploded and seen from the front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view in which the exploded perspective view of FIG. 89 is seen from the rear. is there.

  As shown in the drawing, the back unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example is in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 600 and can be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 600, and has substantially the same shape as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640. A back unit base 2100 having an opening 2102; a stage member 2200 having a stage start port 2220 supported on the lower side of the opening 2102 on the front side of the back unit base 2100; and a right side of the opening 2102 on the front side of the back unit base 2100. A swinging unit 2300 to be supported, and a transparent plate-like partition plate 2104 which is disposed behind the stage member 2200 and the swinging unit 2300 and closes the opening 2102 of the back unit base 2100 (see FIGS. 89 and 90). A traversing body unit 2500 disposed on the rear side of the partition plate 2104, and a traversing body unit A back case 2150 which is attached to the back unit base 2100 and has an opening portion 2152 which is substantially the same shape as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 on the rear wall. I have. In this example, a back box 621 is formed by the back unit base 2100 and the back case 2150.

  Further, the rear unit 2000 has a peripheral control board box 2050 attached to the lower rear portion of the back unit base 2100 and enclosed therein with a peripheral control board 3100 (see FIG. 78), and a lateral side of the peripheral control board box 2050. And a panel relay terminal board 1352 that relays the main control board 1350 in the main control board box 624 and the peripheral control board 3100 in the peripheral control board box 2050 and various sensors for detecting game balls. . Further, the back unit 2000 is attached to the rear side of the back case 2150 and connected to the peripheral control board 3100, and a resistor board 2154 in which resistors are integrated with respect to the circuit of the peripheral control board 3100, and the back case 2150 Further, a peripheral control board 3100 attached to the rear side and a traversing body relay board 2156 that relays the connection between the drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 in the traversing body unit 2500 are further provided.

  The back unit 2000 includes a side decorative board 2010 fixed to the front side of the back unit base 2100 on the rear side of the attacker unit 1500 and the side member 1600, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface. It further includes a stage decoration substrate 2012 that is fixed to the front side of the back unit base 2100 on the rear side of the decoration body 1426 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface thereof. By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the side decoration board 2010 and the stage decoration board 2012, the attacker unit 1500, the side member 1600, the sub decoration body 1426 of the center accessory 1400, and the like can be decorated with light emission. .

  Further, the back unit 2000 detects a general winning port sensor 2110 that detects a game ball received in the general winning port 1502 in the attacker unit 1500 and a gaming ball received in the first start port 1504 in the attacker unit 1500. A first start port sensor 2112 and a stage start port sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball received in the stage start port 2220 of the stage member 2200. These sensors 2110, 2112, and 2114 are provided on the back unit base 2100. It is supported. Further, a magnetic sensor 2116 is attached to the back unit base 2100 of the back unit 2000 at a position behind the first starting port 1504 in the attacker unit 1500, and this magnetic sensor 2116 allows the attacker unit 4 from the front side of the game board 4. The magnetism of the magnet brought close to 1500 can be detected.

  As shown in the figure, the back unit base 2100 in the back unit 2000 has a substantially rectangular outer shape, a rectangular opening 2102 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center, and the rear surface of the game panel 600 at a predetermined position on the outer periphery. A fixing portion 2106 for mounting and fixing to the rear side of the touching game panel 600 is provided. Further, the back unit base 2100 is received by the general winning port 1502 and the first start port 1504 in the attacker unit 1500 and guided to the rear side of the game panel 600 by the guide bar 1520, or the stage start of the stage member 2200. A plurality of guide paths 2108 are provided for receiving the game balls received in the mouth 2220 and releasing them downward. Each of the plurality of guide paths 2108 is provided with a corresponding sensor 2110, 2112, 2114, and a game ball flowing through each guide path 2108 can be detected. In addition, each guiding path 2108 is formed so as to be able to suppress an increase in the circulation speed of the circulating game balls.

  Further, the stage member 2200 in the back unit 2000 is arranged at a position higher than the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 in the center accessory 1400 so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction and can be released to the front side. The first back-side rolling surface 2202, and the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 are lower than the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and higher than the accessory-side rolling surface 1402. And a second back-side rolling surface 2204 that is arranged at a position and that allows the game ball to roll in the left-right direction and to be released to the front side. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79 and the like, the warp outlet 1412 of the center accessory 1400 is disposed so as to open to the left end of the first back-side rolling surface 2202, and the warp inlet is entered from within the game area 605. The game ball that has entered 1410 is supplied to the first back-side rolling surface 2202 of the stage member 2200.

  Each of the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and the second back-side rolling surface 2204 is formed in a wave shape with the left and right ends being the highest, and the substantially center in the left-right direction being raised. Further, the first back-side rolling surface 2202 and the second back-side rolling surface 2204 are the lowest with the bank portions 2202a and 2204a having a predetermined height disposed on the front end side excluding the lowest portion. The portion is provided with curved concave portions 2202b and 2204b having a low front end side and extending in a fan shape in the left-right direction from the rear end to the front end. Further, as shown in the drawing, a concave portion 2202c, which has a predetermined width and becomes lower toward the rear, is provided at a substantially top portion of the first back-side rolling surface 2202 that is raised substantially in the center in the left-right direction. A stage start port 2220 that can receive a game ball is provided at the rear end. The stage member 2200 is supplied so that the game balls that are not received in the stage start port 2220 are supplied from the second back side rolling surface 2204 to the role side rolling surface 1402 of the center role 1400 disposed forward. It has become.

  As shown in the drawing, the first back-side rolling surface 2202 of the stage member 2200 has a width in the front-rear direction that is wide at both the left and right ends, and a width that is substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball at the center side from both the left and right ends. Further, on the rear side of the narrow portion, a shelf portion 2206 is provided that is raised by a substantially constant amount with respect to the first back-side rolling surface 2202. Due to the presence of the shelf 2206, the stage member 2200 has a three-stage rolling surface in which a first back-side rolling surface 2202 and a second back-side rolling surface 2204 are added to the player. It can be shown and the stage can be shown widely.

  In addition, the stage member 2200 is formed of a material having translucency including transparency, and the LED mounted on the surface of the stage decoration substrate 2012 attached to the rear end of the stage member 2200. Can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  Further, a transparent plate-like partition plate 2104 (see FIGS. 89 and 90) is disposed on the rear side of the stage member 2200, that is, between the stage member 2200 and the traversing body unit 2500. 2104 can prevent the game ball from entering the traversing body unit 2500 from the stage member 2200, and can prevent the game ball from entering the traversing body unit 2500 and causing a malfunction. It has become.

[Oscillator unit]
The configuration of the oscillator unit 2300 in the back unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 91A is a perspective view of the oscillating body unit viewed from the front, FIG. 91B is a front view of the oscillating body unit, and FIG. 91C is an enlarged perspective view showing the oscillating mechanism in the oscillating body unit. It is.

  As shown in the figure, the oscillating body unit 2300 in the back unit 2000 is rotatable about a plurality of oscillating bodies 2310 having an external shape simulating a lantern and an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A swing mechanism 2320 that pivotally supports and moves the swing body 2310 in a predetermined direction, a swing body unit base 2330 that holds the swing mechanism 2320, and a swing mechanism 2320 that is fixed to a predetermined position of the swing body unit base 2330 An oscillating body relay board 2340 that relays electrical connection with the control board 3100 is mainly provided. The oscillating body unit 2300 of this example includes three oscillating mechanisms 2320 that pivotally support two oscillating bodies 2310 in the vertical direction. The first oscillating mechanism 2320a, the second oscillating mechanism 2320b, The three swing mechanisms 2320c are arranged in this order.

  As shown in the figure, the swing mechanism 2320 in the swing body unit 2300 includes a swing body solenoid 2322 having a plunger 2322a supported by the swing body unit base 2330 and capable of moving forward and backward, and a plunger 2322a in the swing body solenoid 2322. The first actuating member 2324, which can be rotated about a predetermined axis extending in the front-rear direction by the advancement and retraction of the first and second members, and the first operating member 2324, which can be rotated about a predetermined axis extending in the front-rear direction as the first flange member 2324 rotates. A second operating member 2326 that pivotally supports the rocking body 2310, a rocking body decoration board 2328 that is attached to the second operating member 2326 and is disposed on the rear side of the rocking body 2310 that is pivotally supported and on which the LED is mounted; It has.

  The first actuating member 2324 in the swing mechanism 2320 is formed in a rod shape as a whole, and has a shaft support portion 2324a that is pivotally supported on the swing body unit base 2330 at one end and the other end opposite to the shaft support portion 2324a. A slit-like transmission portion 2324b extending in the longitudinal direction, and a connecting portion 2324c disposed between the transmission portion 2324b and the shaft support portion 2324a to which the tip of the plunger 2322a of the oscillator solenoid 2322 is connected. The second operating member 2326 in the swing mechanism 2320 supports the transmission pin 2326a that can be inserted into the slit-shaped transmission portion 2324b in the first operating member 2324 and the transmission pin 2326a on one end side in a predetermined direction. A transmission rod 2326b that extends to the shaft, a shaft support portion 2326c that is disposed on the other end side of the transmission rod 2326b and is rotatably supported with respect to the oscillator unit base 2330, and a direction in which the transmission rod 2326b extends from the shaft support portion 2326c. Is provided with an action rod 2326d extending in different directions, and an oscillating body support portion 2326e disposed at the tip of the action rod 2326d and capable of supporting the two oscillating bodies 2310 at a predetermined distance apart from each other. 2326b and action rod 2326d are formed in a substantially L shape.

  As shown in the figure, the swing mechanism 2320 has a shaft support portion 2324a of the first operating member 2324 supported by the swing body unit base 2330 on the right side of the swing body solenoid 2322 in a front view, and the first operating member 2324. The first actuating member 2324 is disposed such that the transmission portion 2324b is positioned on the left side of the oscillating body solenoid 2322 below the shaft support portion 2324a. On the other hand, the second actuating member 2326 and the first actuating member 2324 are arranged on the left side, and the shaft support portion 2326c of the second actuating member 2326 is substantially the same height as the shaft support portion 2324a of the first actuating member 2324. The pivot unit base 2330 is pivotally supported. In this state, the transmission pin 2326a of the second actuation member 2326 is inserted into the transmission portion 2324b of the first actuation member 2324, and the action rod 2326d of the second actuation member 2326 is substantially vertically upward from the shaft support portion 2326c. It extends to stand up.

  Note that the two oscillating bodies 2310 that are pivotally supported by the oscillating mechanism 2320 are pivotally supported at different positions in the front-rear direction by the oscillating body support portion 2326e of the second actuating member 2326 so as to overlap half in the left-right direction. And the left swing member 2310 is pivotally supported so as to be slightly higher. In addition, a rocking body decoration board 2328 is fixed to the rear side of the rocking body support part 2326e in the second operating member 2326, and the rocking body 2310 can be appropriately decorated with light emission by LEDs mounted on the rocking body decoration board 2328. It is like that.

  Since the plunger 2322a of the oscillating body solenoid 2322 normally protrudes downward in this oscillating body unit 2300, the action rod 2326d of the second operating member 2326 is substantially upright, and a plurality of oscillating bodies 2310 is a position hidden behind the main decorative body 1422 in the center accessory 1400, and is a position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. On the other hand, when the plunger 2322a is moved upward by energizing the oscillating body solenoid 2322, the first actuating member 2324 is rotated clockwise around the shaft support portion 2324a as the plunger 2322a is moved. The second actuating member 2326 rotates counterclockwise about the shaft support part 2326c via the transmission pin 2326a of the second actuating member 2326 inserted into the transmitting part 2324b of the actuating member 2324.

  Accordingly, the working rod 2326d of the second operating member 2326 rotates so as to fall to the left side, and the swinging body 2310 supported by the swinging body support portion 2326e at the tip of the working rod 2326d is moved from the rear side of the main decoration body 1422. It moves to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640 and moves to a position where it can be seen by the player (see FIG. 108). At that time, since each oscillating body 2310 is pivotally supported, the oscillating body 2310 oscillates for a while by the inertial force even after the driving of the oscillating body solenoid 2322 is stopped. In addition to being able to entertain, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly.

[Campus unit]
The configuration of the traversing body unit 2500 in the back unit 2000 of the gaming machine 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit traversing body unit disassembled into a front traversing body driving unit, a rear traversing body driving unit, and a lower rail unit, and FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the perspective view from the back. FIG. 94 is a front view of the traversing body unit, and FIG. 95 is a rear view of the traversing body unit. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the traversing body unit with a part of the front traversing body drive unit omitted. FIG. 97 (a) is a perspective view of the front traversing body drive unit with a part of the front lower drive unit omitted from the front, and FIG. 97 (b) shows a part of the front lower drive unit in the front traversing body drive unit. FIG. FIG. 98 is a perspective view seen from the front with a part of the front upper drive unit in the front traversing body drive unit omitted. FIG. 99 is a front view of the rear traversing body drive unit, and FIG. 100 is a rear view showing the rear traversing body drive unit with a part thereof omitted. 101 is a perspective view seen from the front with a part of the rear lower body drive unit omitted in the rear traversing body drive unit, and FIG. 102 is a part of the rear upper body drive unit omitted in the rear traverse body drive unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the traversing unit 2500 in the back unit 2000 of the present embodiment traverses a plurality of bowl-shaped traversing bodies 2510 in the left-right direction and arranges the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 in a predetermined arrangement, thereby providing a liquid crystal display device. The front surface of 640 can be covered with a traversing body 2510 (see FIG. 74 and the like). A plurality (four) of the traversing bodies 2510 in the traversing body unit 2500 are arranged on the upper side of the traversing body 2510, extend in the left-right direction, and are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction and the columnar upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail Guided in the left-right direction by 2520b. Each of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b is configured such that two traversing bodies 2510 are guided. The two front traversing bodies 2512 guided by the upper front rail 2520a and the upper and rear rails. A traversing body 2510 is constituted by two rear traversing bodies 2514 guided by 2520.

  Note that the lengths of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b are substantially the same as the length (width) in the horizontal direction of the traversing body unit 2500, and the length in the horizontal direction of the traversing body 2510 ( The width is 5 to 6 times (about 5.6 times). Incidentally, in this example, the horizontal width of the liquid crystal display device 640 (the width of the display screen) is about 0.7 times the total width of the game area 605 and the width of the traversing body 2510 However, it is about 0.25 times the width of the liquid crystal display device 640 (the width of the display screen).

  The traversing body unit 2500 supports the upper front rail 2520a and drives the two front traversing bodies 2512 to traverse in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the rear side of the front traversing body driving unit 2600. A rear traversing body drive unit 2700 that supports the rail 2520b and drives the two rear traversing bodies 2514 to traverse in the left-right direction, and the front traversing body 2512 and the rear traversing traversed by the front traversing body driving unit 2600 and the rear traversing body driving unit 2700. A lower rail unit 2800 for guiding the lower end of the body 2514 in the left-right direction. The front traversing body drive unit 2600 and the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 in the traversing body unit 2500 are arranged side by side so as to be substantially in contact with each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). Further, the front traversing body drive unit 2600, the rear traversing body drive unit 2700, and the lower rail unit 2800 are supported by the back case 2150, respectively.

  First, the traversing body 2510 in the traversing body unit 2500 includes a main body portion 2510a formed in a frame shape, a plate-shaped closing plate 2510b for closing the rear end of the main body portion 2510a, and an upper portion of the main body portion 2510a. And a plate-shaped lower guide portion 2510d that protrudes downward from the lower end of the main body portion 2510a. The guide connecting portion 2510c of the traversing body 2510 is disposed between a pair of ring-shaped insertion rings 2510e through which the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b can be inserted at both ends in the left-right direction, and the insertion rings 2510e. Four guide rollers 2510f that are in contact with the upper and lower ends of the front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b and rotatably supported by the guide connecting portion 2510c, and the traversing body drive units 2600, 2700 are arranged above the guide rollers 2510f. And a connecting portion 2510g connectable to the transverse belts 2624, 2664, 2724, 2764.

  The traversing body 2510 is arranged such that the axis of the pair of insertion rings 2510e passes through the approximate center in the front-rear direction of the main body 2510a (traversing body 2510). A traversing body 2510 guided by the upper rear rail 2520b is guided in a substantially vertical state. In addition, as shown in the figure, the four guide rollers 2510f are each provided with a pair of guide rollers 2510f that are vertically opposed so as to sandwich the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b, in the vicinity of the insertion ring 2510e. Yes. That is, the pair of guide rollers 2510f are arranged at positions as far apart as possible in the left-right direction in the guide connecting portion 2510c, and the traversing body 2510 is guided without rattling.

  In this example, the back traversing body 2514 includes a semicircular decorative portion 2510h provided substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the frame disposed near the center of the game area 605 in the main body portion 2510a, and a decorative portion 2510h. A traversing body decorative board 2511 having an LED provided therein, and the traversing body decoration board 2511 and the central relay terminal plate 2808 of the lower rail unit 2800 are electrically connected to each other and have a flexible flat cable shape. 2150i. Thereafter, the traversing body 2514 can appropriately decorate the decoration portion 2510h with the LED of the traversing body decoration substrate 2511. In this example, the closing plate 2510b of the traversing body 2514 is a transparent plate, and the liquid crystal display device 640 positioned on the rear side through the traversing body 2510 can be viewed from the player side. .

  In this example, the guide connecting portion 2510c of the left front traversing body 2512 and the right rear traversing body 2514 extends longer than the other traversing bodies 2512 and 2514, and the front lower drive unit 2610 There is provided a passage groove 2510j through which the transverse belt 2624 or the transverse belt 2724 of the rear lower drive unit 2710 can pass (see FIGS. 98 and 102), and a connecting portion 2510g is disposed above the passage groove 2510j. Has been. Through the passage grooves 2510j formed in the left front traversing body 2512 and the right rear traversing body 2514, the left front traversing body 2512 and the right rear traversing body 2514 are connected to the traverse belt 2624 and the rear of the front lower drive unit 2610. Contact with the transverse belt 2724 of the lower drive unit 2710 can be avoided.

  Further, the traversing body 2510 is provided with a detection piece 2510k that protrudes downward from the lower end of the lower guide portion 2510d. In the traversing body 2514, it is arranged at the approximate center of the lower guide portion 2510d.

  The front traversing body drive unit 2600 in the traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment includes one upper front rail 2520a that supports two front traversing bodies 2512 so as to traverse in the left-right direction, as shown in FIGS. A front lower drive unit 2610 that supports and drives a front traversing body 2512 (front traversing body right 2512R) disposed on the right side in a front view and a front lower drive unit 2610 disposed on the upper side of the front lower drive unit 2610 and on the left side in a front view And a front upper drive unit 2650 for driving the front traversing body 2512 (front traversing body left 2512L) arranged in the left-right direction.

  The front lower drive unit 2610 in the front traversing body drive unit 2600 is disposed above the right end portion of the lower base plate 2612 and a plate-like lower base plate 2612 that holds both ends of the upper front rail 2520a and extends in the left-right direction. A front right drive motor 2614 having a rotary shaft arranged to extend, a drive gear 2616 that rotates integrally with the rotary shaft of the front right drive motor 2614, a driven gear 2618 that rotates in mesh with the drive gear 2616, and a driven A driving pulley 2620 that rotates integrally with the gear 2618, a driven pulley 2622 that is disposed near the left end of the lower base plate 2612 on the opposite side of the driving pulley 2620, and is wound around the driven pulley 2622 and the driving pulley 2620. A traversing belt 2624, and a right front traversing body 2 at a predetermined position of the traversing belt 2624. Connecting portion 2510g is connected and fixed in 12 (2512R).

  The front lower drive unit 2610 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2626 (see FIG. 96) fixed to the upper surface of the right end portion of the lower base plate 2612 and rotatably supporting the driven gear 2618 and the drive pulley 2620. A right case member 2628 (FIG. 87, etc.) that is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by a support member 2626, accommodates a drive gear 2616, a driven gear 2618, and a drive pulley 2620 and has a front right drive motor 2614 attached to the upper surface. For example).

  Further, the front lower drive unit 2610 is disposed in a ring of a traversing belt 2624 wound around a drive pulley 2620 and a driven pulley 2622 and is held by the lower base plate 2612 so as to be slidable in the left and right directions. A driven pulley support member 2630 that rotatably supports the pulley 2622, a tension spring 2632 that urges the driven pulley support member 2630 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2620, and an end of the tension spring 2632 on the drive pulley 2620 side And a spring holding member 2634 that holds the portion and is fixed to the lower base member 2612. In the front lower drive unit 2610, the driven pulley 2622 is urged away from the drive pulley 2620 by the urging force of the tension spring 2632, and a predetermined tension is applied to the transverse belt 2624 by the urging force. It has become.

  As shown in the figure, the front lower drive unit 2610 has an upper front rail 2520a supported on the lower side of the lower base plate 2612, a drive gear 2616, a driven gear 2618, a drive pulley 2620, a driven pulley 2622, and a traverse. A belt 2624 is disposed on the upper side of the lower base plate 2612. In addition, the lower base plate 2612 of this example is a highly rigid one using a press-molded metal plate having a predetermined thickness, and the upper front rail 2520a, the drive pulley 2620, the driven pulley 2622, etc. are loose. It can be firmly supported without being deformed or deformed.

  On the other hand, the front upper drive unit 2650 in the front traversing body drive unit 2600 is disposed above the lower base plate 2612 and extends in the left-right direction, and the right end is fixed to the upper surface of the right case member 2628 in the front lower drive unit 2610. Upper base plate 2652, front left drive motor 2654 which is disposed on the upper surface of the left end portion of upper base plate 2652 and has a rotation shaft so as to extend downward, and rotates integrally with the rotation shaft of front left drive motor 2654 Driving gear 2656, a driven gear 2658 that rotates in mesh with the driving gear 2656, a driving pulley 2660 that rotates integrally with the driven gear 2658, and the right end of the upper base plate 2652 on the opposite side of the driving pulley 2660 in the left-right direction. It is wound around a driven pulley 2662 arranged in the vicinity, a driven pulley 2661 and a driving pulley 2660. Row belt 2664 has a connecting portion 2510g is connected and fixed in front of the left to a predetermined position of the transverse belt 2664 transverse member 2512 (2512L).

  The front upper drive unit 2650 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2666 (see FIG. 96) fixed to the upper surface of the left end portion of the lower base plate 2612 and rotatably supporting the driven gear 2658 and the drive pulley 2660, and a shaft. It is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by the support member 2666 and is formed at substantially the same height as the right case member 2628 in the front lower drive unit 2610 and accommodates the drive gear 2616, the driven gear 2618 and the drive pulley 2620. And a left case member 2668 (see FIG. 87 and the like) on which the left end portion of the upper base plate 2652 is placed and fixed.

  Further, the front upper drive unit 2650 is disposed in a ring of a traversing belt 2664 wound around a drive pulley 2660 and a driven pulley 2662, and is held by the upper base plate 2652 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A driven pulley support member 2670 that rotatably supports the pulley 2662, a tension spring 2672 that urges the driven pulley support member 2670 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2660, and an end of the tension spring 2672 on the side of the drive pulley 2660 And a spring holding member 2674 that holds the portion and is fixed to the upper base member 2652. In the front upper drive unit 2650, the driven pulley 2662 is urged away from the drive pulley 2660 by the urging force of the tension spring 2672, and a predetermined tension is applied to the transverse belt 2664 by the urging force. It has become.

  In the front upper drive unit 2650, as shown in the figure, a drive gear 2656, a driven gear 2658, a drive pulley 2660, a driven pulley 2662, and a transverse belt 2664 are disposed below the upper base plate 2652. In addition, the upper base plate 2652 of this example is a high-rigidity material using a press-molded metal plate having a predetermined thickness. Without being able to support it firmly. Furthermore, the length of the upper base plate 2652 in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the upper front rail 2520a.

  As shown in the drawing, the front traversing body drive unit 2600 of the present example includes a right case member 2628, a left case member 2668, and a It is arranged and fixed substantially parallel to the vertical direction by a support member 2602 arranged at the approximate center of the direction. The intervals between the drive pulleys 2620 and 2660 and the driven pulleys 2622 and 2662 in the front lower drive unit 2610 and the front upper drive unit 2650 are substantially the same, and are approximately the same as the lateral width of the traversing body 2510. The distance is four times as long as the distance between the upper front rail 2520a and the distance about 0.8 times.

  Further, in the front traversing body drive unit 2600, the drive pulley 2620 in the front lower drive unit 2610 is disposed near the right end of the upper front rail 2520a, and the drive pulley 2660 in the front upper drive unit 2650 is the left end of the upper front rail 2520a. The front lower drive unit 2610 and the front upper drive unit 2650 are in a state where the horizontal range of the horizontal body 2510 is offset to the right and left sides with respect to the center in the left-right direction. . That is, the right front traversing body 2512 (2512R) traversed by the front lower drive unit 2610 can move from the right end of the upper front rail 2520a to the vicinity of the left end, and is traversed by the front upper drive unit 2650. The left front traversing body 2512 (2512L) can move from the left end of the upper front rail 2520a to the vicinity of the right end.

  Next, the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 in the traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 102, etc., is one upper rear that supports two rear traversing bodies 2514 so as to traverse in the left-right direction. A rear lower drive unit 2710 that supports the rail 2520b and drives the rear traversing body 2514 (rear traversing body left 2514L) disposed on the left side in the front view in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the upper side of the rear lower driving unit 2710. And a rear upper drive unit 2750 for driving the rear traversing body 2514 (the rear traversing body right 2514R) arranged on the right side when viewed in the left-right direction.

  A rear lower drive unit 2710 in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 is disposed above the left end of the lower base plate 2712 and a plate-like lower base plate 2712 that holds both ends of the upper rear rail 2520b and extends in the left-right direction. A rear left drive motor 2714 having a rotary shaft arranged to extend, a drive gear 2716 that rotates integrally with the rotary shaft of the rear left drive motor 2714, a driven gear 2718 that rotates in mesh with the drive gear 2716, and a driven A driving pulley 2720 that rotates integrally with the gear 2718, a driven pulley 2722 that is disposed in the vicinity of the right end of the lower base plate 2712 on the opposite side of the driving pulley 2720, and is wound around the driven pulley 2722 and the driving pulley 2720. And a transverse belt 2724 on the left side at a predetermined position of the transverse belt 2724. Connecting portion 2510g is connected and fixed in 14 (2514L).

  The rear lower drive unit 2710 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2726 (see FIG. 101) that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end portion of the lower base plate 2712 and rotatably supports the driven gear 2718 and the drive pulley 2720. A left case member 2728 (FIG. 92, etc.) that is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by a support member 2726, accommodates a drive gear 2716, a driven gear 2718, and a drive pulley 2720 and has a rear left drive motor 2714 attached to the upper surface. For example).

  Further, the rear lower drive unit 2710 is disposed in a ring of a traverse belt 2724 wound around a drive pulley 2720 and a driven pulley 2722 and is held by the lower base plate 2712 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A driven pulley support member 2730 that rotatably supports the pulley 2722, a tension spring 2732 that urges the driven pulley support member 2730 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2720, and an end of the tension spring 2732 on the drive pulley 2720 side. And a spring holding member 2734 which holds the portion and is fixed to the lower base member 2712. Thereafter, the lower drive unit 2710 is urged in a direction in which the driven pulley 2722 is separated from the drive pulley 2720 by the urging force of the tension spring 2732 so that a predetermined tension is applied to the traverse belt 2724 by the urging force. It has become.

  The rear lower drive unit 2710 has an upper rear rail 2520b supported on the lower side of the lower base plate 2712, a drive gear 2716, a driven gear 2718, a drive pulley 2720, a driven pulley 2722, and a transverse as shown in the figure. A belt 2724 is disposed on the upper side of the lower base plate 2712. In addition, the lower base plate 2712 of this example has high rigidity using a press-molded metal plate having a predetermined thickness, and the upper rear rail 2520b, the driving pulley 2720, the driven pulley 2722, and the like are loose. It can be firmly supported without being deformed or deformed.

  On the other hand, the rear upper drive unit 2750 in the rear traverse body drive unit 2700 is disposed above the lower base plate 2712 and extends in the left-right direction, and the left end is fixed to the upper surface of the left case member 2728 in the rear lower drive unit 2710. Upper base plate 2752, rear right drive motor 2754 having a rotation shaft disposed on the upper surface of the right end portion of upper base plate 2752 and extending downward, and rotating integrally with the rotation shaft of rear right drive motor 2754 Driving gear 2756, a driven gear 2758 that rotates in mesh with the driving gear 2756, a driving pulley 2760 that rotates integrally with the driven gear 2758, and the left end of the upper base plate 2752 on the opposite side of the driving pulley 2760 in the left-right direction. It is wound around a driven pulley 2762, a driven pulley 2762, and a driving pulley 2760 arranged in the vicinity. Row belt 2764 has a connecting portion 2510g of right rear transverse member 2514 (2514R) is connected and fixed at a predetermined position of transverse belt 2764.

  The rear upper drive unit 2750 includes a plate-like shaft support member 2766 (see FIG. 102) that is fixed to the upper surface of the right end portion of the lower base plate 2712 and rotatably supports the driven gear 2758 and the drive pulley 2760. It is formed in a box shape whose lower surface is closed by the support member 2766 and is formed at substantially the same height as the left case member 2728 in the rear lower drive unit 2710 and accommodates the drive gear 2716, the driven gear 2718 and the drive pulley 2720. And a right case member 2768 (see FIG. 92 and the like) on which the right end portion of the upper base plate 2752 is placed and fixed.

  Further, the rear upper drive unit 2750 is disposed in a ring of a traverse belt 2764 wound around a drive pulley 2760 and a driven pulley 2762 and is held by the upper base plate 2752 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A driven pulley support member 2770 that rotatably supports the pulley 2762, a tension spring 2772 that urges the driven pulley support member 2770 to move in a direction opposite to the drive pulley 2760, and an end of the tension spring 2772 on the drive pulley 2760 side And a spring holding member 2774 which holds the portion and is fixed to the upper base member 2752. In the rear upper drive unit 2750, the driven pulley 2762 is urged away from the drive pulley 2760 by the urging force of the tension spring 2772, and a predetermined tension is applied to the transverse belt 2764 by the urging force. It has become.

  In the rear upper drive unit 2750, a drive gear 2756, a driven gear 2758, a drive pulley 2760, a driven pulley 2762, and a traverse belt 2764 are disposed below the upper base plate 2752, as illustrated. In addition, the upper base plate 2752 of this example has high rigidity using a metal plate having a predetermined thickness that is press-molded, and the driving pulley 2760, the driven pulley 2762, etc. are rattled or deformed. Without being able to support it firmly. Furthermore, the length of the upper base plate 2752 in the left-right direction is shorter than the length of the upper rear rail 2520b.

  As shown in the drawing, the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 includes a left case member 2728, a right case member 2768, and a left and right case member 2768 in which a rear lower drive unit 2710 and a rear upper drive unit 2750 are disposed at both ends in the left-right direction. The support member 2702 (see FIGS. 99 and 100) disposed substantially in the center of the direction is disposed and fixed substantially parallel to the vertical direction. In addition, the distance between the drive pulleys 2720 and 2760 and the driven pulleys 2722 and 2762 in the rear lower drive unit 2710 and the rear upper drive unit 2750 is substantially the same distance, and is about the width of the traversing body 2510 in the left-right direction. The interval is four times and the interval is about 0.8 times the length of the upper rear rail 2520b.

  Further, in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700, the drive pulley 2720 in the rear lower drive unit 2710 is disposed near the left end of the upper rear rail 2520b, and the drive pulley 2760 in the rear upper drive unit 2750 is the right end of the upper rear rail 2520b. In the rear lower drive unit 2710 and the rear upper drive unit 2750, the transverse range of the transverse body 2510 is offset to the left and right sides with respect to the center in the left-right direction. . That is, the left rear traversing body 2514 (2514L) traversed by the rear lower drive unit 2710 can move from the left end of the upper rear rail 2520b to the vicinity of the right end, and is traversed by the rear upper drive unit 2750. The right rear traversing body 2514 (2514R) can move from the right end of the upper rear rail 2520b to the vicinity of the left end.

  The drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 in the traversing body unit 2500 of this example are stepping motors that can specify the rotational position, and the peripheral control board 3100 rotates the rotational position, that is, the traversing body 2510. The traverse position (movement position) of the traverse body is feedback-controlled, and the origin is set by detecting the corresponding open position sensors 2810, 2811, 2812, 2813 of the detection piece 2510k of each traversing body 2510. It is like that.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the lower rail unit 2800 in the traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment has a length in the left-right direction that is substantially the same as the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b. The lower guide body 2510d of the traversing body 2510 can be inserted between the box-like lower rail body 2802 open at the top and rear and the lower rail body 2802 and the inside of the front end of the lower rail body 2802. A plate-like middle rail 2804 that forms a gap and a rear end member 2806 that closes the rear end of the lower rail main body 2802. The rear end member 2806 is divided into two at the approximate center in the left-right direction.

  The lower rail unit 2800 has a front right open position sensor 2810 that can detect the detection piece 2510k when the right front traversing body 2512 in the traversing body unit 2500 is in the open position at a predetermined position on the bottom of the lower rail main body 2802. A front left open position sensor 2811 capable of detecting the detection piece 2510k when the left front traversing body 2512 is in the open position and a rear right opening capable of detecting the detection piece 2510k when the right rear traversing body 2514 is in the open position. The position sensor 2812 and the rear left open position sensor 2813 capable of detecting the detection piece 2510k when the left rear traversing body 2514 is in the open position and the detection piece 2510k can be detected when the right rear traversing body 2514 is in the closed position. Rear right closed position sensor 2814 and the left rear lateral body 2514 can detect the detection piece 2510k when the left lateral body 2514 is in the closed position. A sensor 2815 further includes a.

  The front right open position sensor 2810 and the front left open position sensor 2811 are respectively disposed at predetermined positions between the front end inside of the lower rail body 2802 and the middle rail 2804. Further, the rear right open position sensor 2812, the rear left open position sensor 2813, the rear right closed position sensor 2814, and the rear left closed position sensor 2815 are respectively disposed at predetermined positions between the middle rail 2804 and the rear end member 2806. ing.

  Further, the lower rail unit 2800 includes a front right opening position sensor 2810, a front left opening position sensor 2811, a rear right opening position sensor 2812, a rear left opening position sensor 2813, a rear right closing position sensor 2814, a rear left closing position sensor 2815, In addition, the wiring member 2510j in the rear traversing body 2514 is electrically connected, and further includes a central relay terminal plate 2808 disposed substantially at the center of the rear end of the lower rail body 2802. Each sensor 2810, 2811, 2812, 2813, 2814, 2815, etc. is connected to the peripheral control board 3100 by this central relay terminal plate 2808.

  In the lower rail unit 2800, the lower guide portion 2510d of the front traversing body 2512 is inserted between the inner side of the front end of the lower rail body 2802 and the middle rail 2804, whereby the lower end of the front traversing body 2512 moves in the front-rear direction. The front traversing body 2512 can be guided in the left-right direction in a state where the above is restricted. Further, the lower rail unit 2800 is attached to the back case 2150 so that the lower guide portion 2510d of the rear traversing body 2512 can be inserted between the middle rail 2804 and the lower edge of the opening 2152 in the back case 2150. A gap can be formed, and thus the rear traversing body 2514 can be guided in the left-right direction in a state where the lower end of the rear traversing body 2514 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. ing.

  The traversing body unit 2500 of the present embodiment is configured to move each traversing body 2510 in the left-right direction independently by traversing each driving motor 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 by the above-described configuration. Can be done. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, the two rear traversing bodies 2514 in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 are brought into contact with each other at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and the two By positioning the front traversing body 2512 (2512R, 2512L) on the left and right outer sides of the two rear traversing bodies 2514 (2514R, 2514L) so as to slightly overlap both ends of the rear traversing body 2514 in front view, The body 2510 can cover the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640. In this example, by setting each traversing body 2510 as described above, there is no sense of incongruity for the player. Further, in a state where the four traversing bodies 2510 cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, the rear traversing body 2512 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction, and the front traversing body 2514 is disposed outside the rear traversing body 2514 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the traversing body 2510 arranged at the center is positioned away from the player side, and the player can be prevented from giving a sense of blockage.

  Further, the traversing body unit 2500 includes a right front traversing body 2512 (2512R) and a rear traversing body 2514 (2514R) at the right ends of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b, and a left front traversing body 2512 (2512L). The rear traversing body 2514 (2514L) is positioned at the left end portions of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b, respectively, so that each traversing body 2510 does not substantially overlap the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 when viewed from the front. The liquid crystal display device 640 can be exposed to the player (see FIGS. 107 and 109).

  Further, in the front traversing body drive unit 2600 in the traversing body unit 2500, the front lower driving unit 2610 causes the right front traversing body 2512 (2512R) to pass from the right end of the upper front rail 2520a beyond the center in the left-right direction. The left front traversing body 2512 (2512L) moves from the left end of the upper front rail 2520a to the opposite side (right side) across the center in the left-right direction. Each front traversing body 2512 can move in the left-right direction within a wide range of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Since the two front traversing bodies 2512 are guided by one upper front rail 2520a, the right or left front traversing body 2512 moves over the other front traversing bodies 2512 to the opposite side in the left-right direction. I can't do that.

  Also in the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 in the traversing body unit 2500, the rear lower driving unit 2710 causes the left rear traversing body 2514 (2514L) to extend from the left end of the upper rear rail 2520b beyond the center in the left-right direction (on the opposite side ( And the rear upper drive unit 2750 moves the right rear traversing body 2514 (2514R) from the right end of the upper rear rail 2520b to the opposite side (left side) beyond the center in the left-right direction. Each rear traversing body 2514 can move in the left-right direction within a wide range of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. Since the two rear traversing bodies 2514 are guided by one upper rear rail 2520b, the right or left rear traversing body 2514 moves over the other rear traversing bodies 2514 to the opposite side in the left-right direction. I can't do that.

  As described above, each traversing body 2510 can move independently in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 other than the above combinations (for example, see FIG. 115). The game state and the like may be suggested by the combination of the traversing body 2510, and the player is entertained not only by the movement of the traversing body 2510 but also by the covering state of the liquid crystal display device 640, and has an interest in the game. It can control that it falls.

<Control configuration with main board and peripheral control board>
A detailed control configuration by the main board 3000 and the peripheral control board 3100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the main board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 104 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration around the peripheral control board in the pachinko machine. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 3000 including a main control board 1350 and a payout control board 1186 and a group of peripheral control boards 3100. The group of the main board 3000 controls game operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral control boards 3100 performs stage operations (light emitting decorations and so on). It controls (moving effects, sound output, liquid crystal display, etc.) (controls the effects of the game).

  As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 1350 of the main board 3000 includes a CPU 3002 as a central processing unit, a ROM 3004 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 3006 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 3002 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 3004 and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral control board 3100 and the payout control board 1186. The RAM 3006 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 1350. The main control board 1350 is connected to the power supply board 3010 via the relay terminal board 625, the payout control board 1186, and the power supply relay terminal board 3008, so that operating power is supplied from the power supply board 3010. ing.

  The input interface of the main control board 1350 includes a gate sensor 3012 that detects a game ball that has entered the gate entrance 1404 via the panel relay terminal board 1352, and a general prize opening that detects a game ball that has won the general prize opening 1502. The sensor 2110, the first start port sensor 2112 for detecting the game ball won in the first start port 1504, the second start port sensor 1522 for detecting the game ball won in the second start port 1506, and the grand prize port 1510 were won. A count sensor 1524 that detects a game ball, a stage start port sensor 2114 that detects a game ball that has won a prize at the stage start port 2220, and an all-winning port number detection sensor 2520 that counts the number of wins for all the winning ports. It is connected. Although not shown in FIG. 103, a magnetic sensor 2116 that detects unauthorized magnetism approaching the game board 4 via the panel relay terminal board 1352 is also connected.

  In addition, an operation sensor 3016 for detecting an operation state of an operation handle portion 461 operated by a player for driving a game ball into the game area 605 via a relay terminal board 625 is provided as an input interface of the main control board 1350. A body frame opening switch 3018 for detecting the opening state of the body frame 3 and a door frame opening switch 3020 for detecting the opening state of the door frame 5 are also connected.

  On the other hand, the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 opens and closes a start opening solenoid 1516 that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 1508 that can open and close the second start opening 1506, and an opening and closing piece 1512 that can close the prize winning opening 1510. An attacker solenoid 1518 to be driven is connected, and a drive signal is output from the main control board 1350. The output interface of the panel relay terminal board 1352 includes a normal symbol display 1806, first and second special symbol displays 1802 and 1804, a normal symbol memory number display 1812, and a first symbol via the status display board 3022. And the second special symbol memory number display units 1808 and 1810 are connected, and from the main control board 1350, the normal symbol display unit 1806 provided in the status display unit 1800 and the first and second special symbol display units 1802 and 1804 are connected. It is possible to output a drive signal to, for example.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 1186 includes a CPU 3024 as a central processing unit, a ROM 3026 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 3028 as a readable / writable memory. Then, the payout control board 1186 processes the command signal input from the main board 1350 and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 and the firing motor 695 connected to the firing control board 3030. Thereby, the payout motor 815 pays out the game ball in accordance with the drive signal, and the launch motor 695 can fire the game ball in accordance with the drive signal.

  The payout control board 1186 is connected to a ball break switch 778 that detects that there are no more game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720. Based on the detection of the ball break switch 778, the player In addition, the ball side (hall computer) is notified that the ball has run out. The payout control board 1186 is connected to a full tank switch 916 for detecting that the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is full. Based on this, a notification that “please remove the game ball from the storage unit” is made.

  In addition, bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 via the respective input / output interfaces. For example, the main board 1350 transmits a prize ball command instructing the prize ball to be paid out. In response to this, an ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 1186 to the main control board 1350.

  Further, an external terminal board 3032 is connected to the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186, and the winning state to the start opening 1504, 1506, 2220, the big winning opening 1510, etc., the fluctuation state of the normal symbol / special symbol, etc. Various information such as a gaming state based on each lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the gaming facility.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104, the peripheral control board 3100 has electronic components such as a CPU 3102, a ROM 3104, a RAM 3106, and the like, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components. . In addition, the peripheral control board 3100 is provided with a ROM 3108 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 3110 that outputs sound and music according to the contents of production based on the sound source stored in the ROM 3108. It has been. Note that communication is performed in only one direction between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main board 3000 and the peripheral control board 3100 and the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 3100. Even if the command is sent, the reverse is not done. In addition, operation power is supplied from the power supply board 3010 to the peripheral control board 3100 via the power supply relay terminal board 3008.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 78, the peripheral control board 3100 of this example is enclosed in the peripheral control board box 2050 and disposed inside the board substrate holder 623, and cannot sufficiently dissipate heat. Since there is a possibility, among the electronic components constituting the electronic circuit of the peripheral control board 3100, a position where the plurality of resistors are separated from the peripheral control board 3100 and sufficient heat dissipation can be secured (rear case 2150). The resistor board 2154 having a plurality of resistors is connected in both directions. As a result, the temperature rise on the peripheral control board 3100 can be suppressed, and the occurrence of problems in the effect control related to the game due to the heat effect of the CPU 3102 and the like can be prevented.

  The peripheral control board 3100 is connected to a liquid crystal display control board 3112 that controls display of effect images on the liquid crystal display device 640. A liquid crystal display device 640 is connected to the liquid crystal display control board 3112, and a command signal (display command) transmitted from the peripheral control board 3100 is processed by the liquid crystal display control board 3112, and the liquid crystal display control board 3112 receives the command signal. A drive signal is output. More specifically, the liquid crystal display control board 3112 includes a CPU 3114, a RAM 3116, a ROM 3118, a VDP 3120, and an image ROM 3122.

  The CPU 3114 of the liquid crystal display control board 3112 receives the command signal (display command) sent from the peripheral control board 3100 via the input / output interface, performs arithmetic processing based on the display command, and performs the processing of the VDP 3120. Take control. The RAM 3116 provides a work area for the CPU 3114 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 3118 holds a program for the CPU 3114 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 3120 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 3120, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 3120, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 3114 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed variously. The image ROM 3122 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display designs, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 3100 and the liquid crystal display control board 3112 with each input / output interface. The liquid crystal display control board 3112 is also supplied with operating power from the power supply board 3010 via the peripheral control board 3100 and the power supply relay terminal board 3008.

  Although not shown in FIG. 104, the peripheral control board 3100 includes a door frame decoration lamp 3124 provided on the door frame 5 via a lamp driving board 3200 and a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290, and A speaker 163 and the like are connected. Then, the peripheral control board 3100 transmits a door frame side lighting / flashing command to the lamp driving board 3200, and an IC mounted on the lamp driving board 3200 receives the door frame decoration lamp via the frame decoration relay board 290 based on this command. A drive signal is output to 3124. A drive signal is output from the peripheral control board 3100 to the speaker 163 and the like via (through) the lamp drive board 3200 and the frame decoration relay board 290. In addition, operation buttons 330 including a left button 330a, a middle button 330b, and a right button 330c arranged on the front surface of the door frame 5 are connected to the lamp driving board 3200 via a frame decoration relay terminal plate 290, respectively. The operation signals of the operation buttons are input to the peripheral control board 3100 via (through) the lamp driving board 3200 and the frame decoration relay terminal board 290.

  Further, the peripheral control board 3100 includes a main decoration board 3126 for emitting and decorating the main decoration body 1422 in the center accessory 1400 via the lamp driving board 3200, and a petal motor 3128 for rotating the rotation decoration body 1424 in the center accessory 1400. Rotating body decoration board 1424b for decorating the rotating decoration body 1424, Attacker unit decoration board 3130 for lighting and decorating the attacker unit 1500, Side decoration board 2010 for lighting and decorating the side decoration body 1600, and the stage member 2200 and the center accessory 1400 A stage decoration substrate 2012 for illuminating the sub decoration body 1426 is connected. Then, by outputting a driving signal from the peripheral control board 3100 to the petal motor 3128 via the lamp driving board 3200, the petal motor 3128 can be driven to rotate the rotating decoration body 1424. ing. Further, the peripheral control board 3100 transmits a game board side lighting / flashing command to the lamp driving board 3200, and an IC mounted on the lamp driving board 3200 is mounted on each of the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 based on this command. By outputting a drive signal to each of the LEDs, each LED can be appropriately driven to emit light and have a light emission decoration (light emission effect). The peripheral control board 3100 outputs a driving signal to the LEDs mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 via the lamp driving board 3200 (through), thereby appropriately driving the LEDs to emit light ( Light emission effect). As described above, the peripheral control board 3100 is mounted on each of the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010 on the IC mounted on the lamp drive board 3200 by transmitting the game board side lighting / flashing command to the lamp drive board 3200. While controlling the LED, the LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012 is directly controlled by outputting a drive signal to the LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012.

  In addition, a longitudinal sensor 1428 is bidirectionally connected to the peripheral control board 3100 so that the light emitting unit 1428a of the longitudinal sensor 1428 emits light and a detection signal from the light receiving unit 1428b is received in a predetermined gaming state. Thus, it is possible to detect a player's hand moving in the vertical direction within a predetermined range in front of the game area 605.

  Further, a swing body solenoid 2322 and a swing body decoration board 2328 are connected to the peripheral control board 3100 via a lamp drive board 3200 and a swing body relay board 2340, respectively. Then, the peripheral control board 3100 transmits an oscillating body driving command to the lamp driving board 3200, and an IC mounted on the lamp driving board 3200 and the oscillating body solenoid 2322 and the oscillating body 2340 via the oscillating body relay board 2340 based on this command. By outputting a drive signal to the moving body decoration board 2328, the rocking body solenoid 2322 is driven to rock the plurality of rocking bodies 2310, or the LEDs mounted on the rocking body decoration board 2328 are driven to emit light to drive the plurality of rocking bodies. The moving body 2310 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, the peripheral control board 3100 includes a front right drive motor 2614, a front left drive motor 2654, a rear left drive motor 2714, and a rear right drive motor in the traversing body unit 2500 via the lamp driving board 3200 and the traversing body relay board 2156. 2754 are connected bidirectionally, and a traversing body decoration board 2511 is connected via a lamp driving board 3200 and a traversing body relay board 2156. Then, the peripheral control board 3100 transmits a motor drive command to the lamp drive board 3200, and the IC mounted on the lamp drive board 3200 receives each drive motor 2614, 2654, via the traversing body relay board 2156 based on this command. 2714 and 2754 and a drive signal are output to the LEDs mounted on the traversing body decoration board 2511. Further, rotational position information from the encoders of the respective drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 is input to the peripheral control board 3100 via the lamp drive board 3200 and the traversing body relay board 2156. Thereby, the rotational drive of each drive motor 2614, 2654, 2714, 2754 is feedback-controlled, and the traversing position (movement position) of the front traversing body 2512 and the rear traversing body 2514 is traversed in the left-right direction with high accuracy, and The decorative portion 2510h of the body 2514 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, on the peripheral control board 3100, a front right open position sensor 2810, a front left open position sensor 2811, and a rear right open position sensor 2812 disposed on the lower rail unit 2800 of the traversing body unit 2500 via the central relay terminal plate 2808. The rear left open position sensor 2813, the rear right closed position sensor 2814, and the rear left closed position sensor 2815 are connected. Based on the detection signals input from the position sensors 2810, 2811, 2812, 2813, 2814, 2815. The drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 are controlled.

[Lamp drive board]
Next, the lamp driving substrate 3200 will be described. FIG. 105 is a part of a circuit constituting the lamp driving substrate 3200.

[Configuration of gradation control IC]
The lamp driving substrate 3200 includes a gradation control IC 3200b as shown in FIG. The gradation control IC 3200b includes a noise removal unit 3200ba, a serial unit 3200bb, a gradation update control unit 3200bc, an ON time setting table register group 3200bd, a waveform table register group 3200be, a control register group 3200bs, and a pulse generation unit 3200bf. , An input / output unit 3200bg and an output unit 3200bh.

[Noise removal part]
The noise removing unit 3200ba receives the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command output from the peripheral control board 3100 via the serial input terminal 3200bk. However, noise is removed from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command, which are electrical signals. The gradation control IC 3200b has a built-in transmission circuit (not shown), and a clock signal from the transmission circuit is input to the noise removing unit 3200ba. Based on the input clock signal, the noise removing unit 3200ba converts the predetermined band frequency component into an electrical signal, such as initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and A filter process to be removed from the application start command is performed. In this filtering process, the noise of 1 microsecond (μs) obtained by experiment is removed, and the filtered initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, The application start command is input to the serial unit 3200bb. As described above, the initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, and application start command that are still affected by noise are not directly input to the serial unit 3200bb. It is like that.

[Serial part]
When the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command filtered by the noise removal unit 3200ba are input, the serial unit 3200bb receives serial data. Certain initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command are restored to parallel data. The initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command restored to the parallel data are input to the gradation update control unit 3200bc. Yes. The serial unit 3200bb has a built-in input / output direction register and input register (not shown). When the power is turned on, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application In addition to the start command, an input / output direction setting command received from the peripheral control board 3100 is stored in the input / output direction register. The input / output direction register sets the input / output unit 3200bg to the input side or the output side based on the input / output direction setting command. Specifically, the input / output direction register is a terminal of the input / output terminal group 3200bm that outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the door frame decorative lamp 3124 and the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010. Of the input / output terminal group 3200bm to which the operation signal from the operation button 330 including the left button 330a, the middle button 330b, and the right button 330c is input. The input / output unit 3200bg is set on the input side so that becomes an input terminal. In the input / output direction register, when the input / output unit 3200bg is set to the input side, a signal is input to the input register via the terminal of the input / output terminal group 3200bm and the input / output unit 3200bg. The serial unit 3200bb outputs the signal input to the input register to the peripheral control board 3100 via the serial output terminal 3200bn. In the present embodiment, an operation signal from the operation button 330 including the left button 330a, the middle button 330b, and the right button 330c is input to the input register via the terminals of the input / output terminal group 3200bm and the input / output unit bg. The serial unit 3200bb outputs the operation signal to the peripheral control board 3100 via the serial output terminal 3200bn.

[Gradation update control unit]
When the initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, and application start command, which are restored to parallel data by the serial unit 3200bb, are input to the gradation update control unit 3200bc. Control is performed to store the input initial data in the ON time setting table register group 3200bd and the waveform table register group 3200be, which is a RAM built in the gradation control IC 3200b, or the door frame side lighting is input. The flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the gradation lighting command, and the application start command are controlled to be stored in a command register (not shown). Based on the door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command stored in the command register, the gradation update control unit 3200bc determines the door frame decoration lamp 3124 and each decoration. Control is performed to create a pattern for lighting or blinking the LEDs mounted on the boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010 with reference to the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 3200bd and the waveform table register group 3200be. . The created pattern for lighting or blinking the LED mounted on the door frame decoration lamp 3124 and each decoration board 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 is input to the pulse generation unit 3200bf and stored in the control register group 3200bs. The In other words, the control register group 3200bs stores patterns for lighting or blinking the LED mounted on the door frame decoration lamp 3124 and the decoration boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010 that are being executed immediately before or currently.

  Here, the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 executes processing related to the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the command received from the main control board 1350 and displays the liquid crystal display device 640 on the liquid crystal display control board 3112. A process for transmitting a display command for controlling the display and a process related to the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting time, light emission luminance, etc.) of the LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012 are executed, and the transistor 3200a is controlled according to the lighting mode. Processing for setting drive signals to be output in parallel and outputting the set drive signals, and lighting modes (emission color, lighting time, emission luminance, etc.) of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 Each device that executes processing and is serially output to the lamp driving board 3200 according to the lighting mode. Set various commands (door frame side lighting flashing command, game board side lighting flashing command, gradation lighting command, application start command, etc.) for controlling the lighting state of the LEDs mounted on the boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 Then, the process of transmitting the set command is executed at a periodic interrupt cycle by a timer (main process; also referred to as a 32 ms steady process). In this example, the above processing is executed by the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 every 32 ms. The interrupt period every 32 ms is set based on the time required to draw one frame (all areas of the liquid crystal display device 640) by the VDP 3120. Note that the interrupt cycle of the above-described processing executed by the CPU 3104 may be changed according to the performance of the VDP 3120.

  Then, the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 is within the remaining time of the main process (the time from the end of the main process to the start of the next main process, specifically the start of the main process. When the main process is completed within 32 ms, an extra time until the elapsed time from the start of the main process after the main process reaches 32 ms, for example, Xms (0 <X <32 after the main process is started). ), The control registers in the control register group 3200bs are inspected at (32-X) ms), and the door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, and gradation lighting are performed. If the pattern is different from the lighting and blinking pattern instructed by the command and the application start command (if abnormal data is stored), these are described above. Lights or blinks in a normal lighting or blinking pattern by rewriting the lighting or blinking pattern (normal data) instructed by the frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, and application start command. Is controlled to be performed.

  Note that the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 cannot check all the control registers in the control register group 3200bs or rewrite all the data in the remaining time of the main processing. For this reason, the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 inspects little by little using the remaining time of the main processing, and rewrites the abnormal part little by little when an abnormality is found. Thereby, the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 repeatedly inspects the control register group 3200bs little by little within the remaining time of 32 ms, and abnormal data (door frame side lighting flashing command, game board) When the side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, and application start command are stored, the abnormal data is stored as normal data (door frame side lighting / blinking). The same pattern as the lighting or blinking pattern instructed by the command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the gradation lighting command, and the application start command).

  In this example, the gradation control IC is mounted on the lamp driving board 3200 to control various lamps / LEDs. However, the CPU that controls the various lamps / LEDs is mounted on the lamp driving board 3200. In this case, the CPU mounted on the lamp driving board 3200 inspects the contents of the control register group 3200bs according to the command from the peripheral control board 3100, and the door frame side lighting / flashing command, game If a pattern different from the pattern to be lit or blinked by the panel side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command is stored, this pattern is used as the door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side. Same as lighting or blinking pattern instructed by lighting flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command It may be rewritten in the pattern.

[Registers for ON time setting table]
The ON time setting table register group 3200bd is configured to store initial data received from the peripheral control board 3100, such as when the power is turned on, under the control of the gradation update control unit 3200bc. The ON time setting table register group 3200bd is composed of a total of eight ON time setting tables including an ON time setting table 0 to an ON time setting table 7. Each ON time setting table is composed of a total of 32 gradations of 0 gradations to 31 gradations. In these 0 gradations to 31 gradations, ON times for designating light emission luminance are set by pulse widths, respectively, and 12-bit widths, that is, 0 to 4096 milliseconds (ms) ON times are set. The size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 3200bd is 3072 bits (= 8 tables × 32 gradations × 12 bits), and the bit rate from the peripheral control board 3100 to the lamp driving board 3200 is As described above, since it is set to 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs), the transmission time of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 3200bd is 12.288 milliseconds (= 3072 bits × 4 μs) ( ms).

[Registers for waveform table]
Similar to the ON time setting table register group 3200bd, the waveform table register group 3200be stores the initial data received from the peripheral control board 3100 under the control of the gradation update control unit 3200bc. It has become. The waveform table register group 3200be is composed of a total of three waveform tables, waveform table 0 to waveform table 2. Each waveform table is composed of a total of 90 waveforms of 0 to 89 waveforms. In these 0 waveform to 89 waveform, an array in which 0 gradation to 31 gradation of the ON time setting table 0 to the ON time setting table 7 stored in the ON time setting table register group 3200bd are arranged is set. A 5-bit width, that is, 0 gradation to 32 gradation is set. The size of data stored in the waveform table register group 3200be is 1350 bits (= 3 tables × 90 waveforms × 5 bits), and the bit rate from the peripheral control board 3100 to the lamp driving board 3200 is 250 kbps (pulse width: 4 μs), the transmission time of data stored in the waveform table register group 3200be is 5.4 ms (= 1350 bits × 4 μs).

  The CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 transmits initial data to the lamp control board 3200 when the power is turned on, and at the remaining time of the main process (executed every 32 ms in this example; 32 ms steady process). Data that can be transmitted in the remaining time of 32 ms is extracted from the same initial data as the initial data transmitted to the lamp driving substrate 3200 when the power is turned on, and is transmitted to the gradation control IC 3260b as transmission data. In the remaining time of the main process (executed every 32 ms in this example; 32 ms steady process), grayscale data is transmitted data that can be transmitted in the remaining time of 32 ms from the same initial data transmitted when the power is turned on. The initial data transmitted to the control IC 3260b and stored in the ON time setting table register group 3260bd and the waveform table register group 3260be is overwritten little by little using the remaining time of 32 ms. As a result, the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 3260bd and the waveform table register group 3260be are overwritten little by little within the remaining time of 32 ms, and the ON time setting table register group is affected by noise. The initial data stored in 3260bd and the waveform table register group 3260be is prevented from becoming abnormal data.

[Pulse generator]
When the pulse generation unit 3200bf receives a pattern for lighting or blinking the LED mounted on the door frame decoration lamp 3124 and the decoration boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010, which is created by the gradation update control unit 3200bc, A pulse is generated based on these patterns. The generated pulse is input to the input / output unit 3200bg and the output unit bh. The input / output unit 3200bg outputs the input pulse as a lighting signal or a blinking signal from the terminals of the input / output terminal group 3200bm and the output terminal group 3200bp to the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010. Or a lighting signal or a flashing signal is output to the door frame decoration lamp 3124 via the frame decoration relay terminal plate 290. The output unit 3200bh outputs the input pulse as a lighting signal or a blinking signal from the terminal of the output terminal group 3200bp to the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010. As a result, the LEDs and door frame decoration lamps 3124 mounted on the decoration boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010 can be turned on or blinked.

[Various commands]
As described above, the gradation control IC 3200b receives the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the gradation lighting command, and the application start command, which are output in parallel from the peripheral control board 3100. These door frame side lighting / flashing commands, game board side lighting / flashing commands, gradation lighting commands, and application start commands are the terminal numbers for which the input / output terminal group 3200bm is set as an output terminal and the terminals of the output terminal group 3200bp. No., any gradation number from 0 gradation to 31 gradation, any waveform table number from waveform table 0 to waveform table 2, waveform transition time which is time until transition to next waveform, Of the initial value of the waveform counter (any waveform number from 0 waveform to 89 waveforms), maximum waveform counter value (any waveform number from 0 waveforms to 89 waveforms), ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 The ON time setting table number or the like. The door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, and application start command have a size of 36 bits (4.5 bytes), and the input / output terminal group 3200bm is an output terminal. Are set individually for the terminals set to 1 and the terminals of the output terminal group 3200 bp.

[Other configuration of lamp driving board]
The lamp driving substrate 3200 includes a transistor 3200a (preferably an open collector type). A drive signal that is parallel data output from the peripheral control board 3100 is input to the transistor 3200a, and the drive signal is output to the stage decoration board 2012. Thereby, LED mounted on the stage decoration board | substrate 2012 can be lighted suitably. In this example, the LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012 is appropriately turned on, and any one of the three types of symbols “no pattern”, “芒”, and “芒 to moon” is displayed on the display portion 1426d. . When all the LEDs mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012 are turned off or turned on with the same color, a “no pattern” symbol is displayed on the display portion 1426d. Usually, the LEDs mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012 are displayed. It is in a state where “芒” is displayed on the display portion 1426d by appropriately lighting. If it is determined that the CPU 3002 mounted on the main control board 1350 becomes “5R big hit” and “15R big hit”, for example, the CPU 3002 is mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 before the display result of the variable display is stopped. When it is determined that a lottery or the like using a random number by the CPU 3102 is executed to notify that it is a big hit, that is, when it is determined that a big hit is confirmed, a symbol “芒 to moon” is displayed on the display unit 1426d. Notifying you that it will be a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by grasping that a big hit (in addition to the fact that a symbol with high rarity was displayed) is displayed when the symbol “芒 to moon” is displayed on the display portion 1426d. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  The LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 serves as a so-called big hit confirmation notification means for notifying in advance that a big hit will be given by the symbol displayed on the display unit 1426d. Therefore, reliability is required for the lighting mode of the LEDs mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012, in other words, the symbols displayed on the display unit 1426d. In this example, a transistor with an open collector structure that is resistant to noise is used as the transistor 3200a, so that the reliability of the symbol displayed on the display portion 1426d can be improved. In addition, the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 always updates the drive signal output in parallel to the transistor 3200a every time the main process is executed, that is, updates at an extremely short cycle of every 32 ms. Even if it is mistakenly lit, it will only maintain the wrong lighting state in a very short period of up to 32 ms, and it will return to the normal state without the player being aware of the erroneous lighting. Therefore, the reliability of the symbol displayed on the display portion 1426d can be improved.

  As described above, in this example, the CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 executes processing related to the display content of the liquid crystal display device 640 based on the command received from the main control board 1350 and displays the liquid crystal display on the liquid crystal display control board 3112. Depending on the lighting mode, processing for transmitting a display command for controlling the display of the device 640 and processing related to the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting time, light emission luminance, etc.) of the LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012 are executed. The process of setting the drive signal to be output in parallel to the transistor 3200a and outputting the set drive signal, the lighting mode of the LED mounted on each decorative board 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 (light emission color, lighting time, light emission) Brightness, etc.) is executed and serialized to the lamp driving board 3200 according to the lighting mode. Various commands (door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, start of application) for controlling the lighting state of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 to be applied A command or the like) and a process for transmitting the set command are executed at a periodic interrupt cycle (in this example, every 32 ms) by a timer (main process; also referred to as a 32 ms steady process). The CPU 3104 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 is configured to update (reset) the drive signal output in parallel from the peripheral control board 3100 to the transistor 3200a every time this main process is executed, that is, every 32 ms. ing.

  In this example, the drive signal output in parallel to the LEDs mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 having a special meaning is configured to be updated every execution of the main process (every 32 ms). However, the stage decoration board 2012 is used in the main process. The processing related to the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting time, light emission luminance, etc.) of the LED mounted on is executed, and the drive signal output in parallel to the transistor 3200a is set according to the lighting mode, and this set drive signal is output After that, the drive signal output to the LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 may be updated at an interval shorter than the execution cycle of the main processing. For example, the lighting mode has a special meaning and is reliable. The drive signal output to the LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 that is required to have a special meaning in its lighting mode In order to control the lighting state of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010 that do not require reliability, various commands (door frame side lighting flashing command, game board side lighting flashing command, gradation By updating the lighting command, the application start command, etc.) at intervals shorter than the interval for outputting to the lamp driving substrate 3200 (interval for executing the main processing; 32 ms), the stage decoration substrate 2012 having a special meaning in the lighting mode. The reliability with respect to the lighting mode of the LED mounted on the LED is not limited to the lighting mode with respect to the lighting mode of the LED mounted on each of the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010. You may comprise so that it may become higher than reliability. Specifically, when the main process executed every 32 ms is executed, the process related to the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting time, light emission luminance, etc.) of the LED mounted on each decorative board 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 And various commands for controlling the lighting state of the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010 that are serially output to the lamp driving board 3200 according to the lighting mode (door frame side lighting / flashing command) The game board side lighting / flashing command, gradation lighting command, application start command, etc.) are set and the set command is transmitted, and the lighting mode (light emission color, lighting time, And the like, and the parallel output to the transistor 3200a according to the lighting mode. Set the signal and outputs a drive signal to the set may be configured to update the drive signal parallel output to these transistor 3200a in a period of less than 32 ms (e.g., 2ms per).

  Note that the drive signal that is output in parallel from the peripheral control board 3100 to the transistor 3200a only needs to be updated in such a short cycle that the player does not realize that the player has erroneously turned on. Here, the sensory limit for not knowing that the lamp has been lit even if it is erroneously lit is 32 ms. If the mislit condition continues for a period longer than 32 ms, it is possible to recognize that the lamp has been mislit. Become. In this example, the drive signal output in parallel to the transistor 3200a is updated every 32 ms, so that even if the LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 is erroneously lit, the player will be aware that it has been lit erroneously. It can be corrected to a normal lighting state. On the other hand, the main process is not limited to the above-described every 32 ms, and can be executed at an arbitrary interval, and the main process may be executed at an interval of 32 ms or more or less than 32 ms.

  As described above, in this example, the peripheral control board 3100 outputs the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the gradation lighting command, and the application start command to the lamp driving board 3200, thereby controlling the gradation control. While the IC 3200b controls the LEDs and door frame decoration lamps 3124 mounted on the decoration boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 provided for decoration of the game board 4 and the door frame 5, a stage as a jackpot confirmation notification means The peripheral control board 3100 directly controls the LEDs mounted on the decorative board 2012. It should be noted that when the gradation control IC 3200b controls the LEDs mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 in the same manner as the LEDs and door frame decoration lamps 3124 mounted on the decoration boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010, the control board Since the inspection of the register group 3200bs is inspected little by little within the remaining time of 32 ms, there is a possibility that the abnormality of the control register relating to the LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 cannot be quickly corrected (for example, 0 at the longest). Is maintained in an abnormal state for 5 seconds), and the player displays the symbol “芒 月 月” on the display unit 1426d even though it is not determined to be “5R jackpot” or “15R jackpot”. May cause distrust to the game and reduce the entertainment interest. That is, it is determined that the light emitting member (the LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012) having a special meaning in the lighting mode (LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012) is erroneously turned on ("5R big hit" and "15R big hit"). In spite of the fact that the symbol “芒 to moon” is displayed on the display unit 1426d), not only the player cannot be notified of the necessary information, but the jackpot is not confirmed. There was a risk of reducing the interest in the game by notifying incorrect information (called big hit confirmation). In this example, the lighting mode does not have a special meaning, and the lamp or LED for decoration which does not require reliability (the LED mounted on each of the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010 and the door frame decoration lamp 3124). ) Is controlled by the gradation control IC 3200b, and the peripheral control board 3100 directly controls the LEDs mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 as a jackpot confirmation notification means that requires reliability by having a special meaning in the lighting mode. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the lighting state of the LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012, the peripheral control board 3100 can be quickly returned to the normal state, so that the LED is mounted on the stage decoration board 2012. The reliability with respect to the lighting mode of LED can be improved.

[Main production operations]
Main effect operations using the configuration of the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 to 119. FIG. 106A is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the sub decoration body in the center accessory, and FIG. 106B is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of the display unit in the sub decoration body. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board with the traversing body fully opened, and FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing the traversing body fully opened and the swinging body exposed and swung. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of the traversing body from the state in which a plurality of traversing bodies cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device to the exposed (fully opened) state, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the motion which coat | covers the front surface of a liquid crystal display device with a several different traversing body. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram showing a movable range of the traversing body, and FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of movement in which one traversing body in the front-rear direction passes the other traversing body, FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a movement in which traversing bodies arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction cross each other. Further, FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device with a plurality of traversing bodies different from those of FIG. 109 and FIG. 110, and FIG. 115 is a diagram of the liquid crystal display device with a plurality of traversing bodies. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the further different motion which coat | covers a front surface. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of the traversing body from the state of (g) in FIG. 115 until the liquid crystal display device is fully opened. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movement of the traversing body in a state where the front surface of the liquid crystal display device is covered. FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movement of the traversing body in contact with each other. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the movement of three traversing bodies arranged at predetermined intervals on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

  First, the operation of the sub decoration body 1426 in the center accessory 1400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 106 (a), the sub decoration body 1426 in the center accessory 1400 includes a bill portion 1426b simulating a flower card. The bill portion 1426b includes a rectangular frame body 1426c and a frame body 1426c. A white plate-like display portion 1426d that closes the inside of the frame and has translucency, and an arc-shaped first partition wall that is arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction on the rear side of the display portion 1426d and has a high horizontal center. 1426e and the cylindrical 2nd partition 1426f arrange | positioned above the 1st partition 1426e. Further, the bill portion 1426b in the sub decoration body 1426 is attached to the game board 4, and a part of the stage decoration board 2012 in the back unit 2000 is desired on the rear side. Then, by appropriately emitting the corresponding LED provided on the stage decoration substrate 2012, the display unit 1426d inside the frame body 1426c in the tag unit 1426b displays “no pattern”, “芒” and “ It is possible to display the three symbols of “Moon and Moon”.

  Specifically, by turning on or turning off all the LEDs of the stage decoration substrate 2012 arranged on the rear side of the display unit 1426d in the bill unit 1426b, as shown in FIG. As shown, a “no pattern” bill portion 1426b can be used. The LED corresponding to the bill portion 1426b is a color LED capable of emitting various colors other than white. Depending on the color to be lit, not only the white “no pattern” but also the colored “no pattern” It is possible to display various effects by changing what is suggested by the color.

  On the other hand, the LEDs below the arc-shaped first partition 1426e in the bill portion 1426b are not turned on (turned off), and all the LEDs above the first partition 1426e are turned on in the same color (for example, white). As a result, the symbol “芒” as shown in FIG. Further, in this state, by changing the emission color of the LED above the first partition 1426e between the inside and the outside of the second partition 1426f, as shown in FIG. Can be displayed (for example, the inside of the second partition wall 1426f emits light in white and the outside in red).

  As described above, by appropriately emitting the LED disposed on the rear side of the bill portion 1426b in the sub decorative body 1426, a plurality of types of symbols can be displayed on the display portion 1426d. In addition to being able to display an appropriate symbol according to the gaming state and the lottery result by winning a game ball to each start port 1504, 1506, 2220, etc., the expectation for the game is enhanced by the displayed symbol It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Next, the operation of the oscillator unit 2300 in the back unit 2000 will be described. As shown in FIG. 107, the swinging unit 2300 is located on the rear side (immediately after) of the main decorative body 1422 in the center accessory 1400 and is hard to see from the player side. Yes. As shown in the figure, the rocking body 2310 in the rocking body unit 2300 is partially visible from the player side. Therefore, when the rocking body 2310 that is stationary enters a predetermined gaming state, It becomes possible to think that it comes out to the position where it can be seen, and when the rocking body 2310 moves, the rocking body 2310 can have a sense of expectation. Can be suppressed.

  The oscillating body unit 2300 of this example includes an oscillating mechanism 2320 including a first oscillating mechanism 2320a, a second oscillating mechanism 2320b, and a third oscillating mechanism 2320c, which respectively support two oscillating bodies 2310. . When the swing body solenoid 2322 included in the first swing mechanism 2320a, the second swing mechanism 2320b, and the third swing mechanism 2320c is driven according to the gaming state, each swing supported by the swing body solenoid 2322 is driven. The moving body 2310 moves from the rear side of the main decoration body 1422 to the front surface side of the liquid crystal display device 640 and moves to a position where it can be seen by the player as shown in FIG. Since each of them is pivotally supported, even after the drive by the oscillating body solenoid 2322 is stopped, the oscillating body 2310 oscillates for a while due to the inertial force, and the oscillating body 2310 can be more enjoyed by the oscillating body 2310. As well as being able to attract the player's interest.

  Next, the operation of the traversing body unit 2500 in the back unit 2000 will be described. The traversing body unit 2500 includes four traversing bodies 2510 that are disposed on the rear side of the center accessory 1400 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 640 and can traverse in the left-right direction. The traversing body unit 2500 includes four traversing bodies 2510 that are divided into two in front and rear, and the front traversing body 2512 (front traversing body right 2512R and front traversing body left 2512L) arranged in the front side in the left-right direction. A front traversing body drive unit 2600 that traverses the front traversing body drive unit 2600 to be traversed and the rear traversing body 2514 (the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body 2514L) disposed rearward of the front traversing body 2512. And. Each traversing body 2510 (2512, 2514) is moved out of the frame of the center accessory 1400 by the front traversing body drive unit 2600 and the rear traversing body drive unit 2700, and becomes invisible to the player. Move (transverse) between (invisible area A2) and a position (visible area A1) that is positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 640 and visible to the player within the frame of the center accessory 1400. Can be done.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 109A, the traversing bodies 2510 (2512, 2514) in the traversing body unit 2500 are arranged so that the rear traversing bodies 2514R, 2514L are in contact with each other at the approximate center in the left-right direction. The front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L are arranged at positions where they contact each other on the left and right sides of the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L. One traversing body 2510 covers the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, that is, a plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are closed.

  Then, from the state in which the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is closed by the four traversing bodies 2510, first, the drive motors 2714 and 2754 of the rear traversing body drive unit 2700 are driven to rotate in appropriate directions, and the left rear traversing body left 2514L is moved to the left side and the right rear traversing body right 2514R is moved to the right side at substantially the same time (see (a) in the figure). When the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are moved to positions so as to substantially overlap the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L, the driving motors 2614 and 2654 of the front moving body driving unit 2600 are further driven to rotate in an appropriate direction, and the right front The traversing body right 2512R is moved to the right side, and the left front traversing body left 2512L is moved to the left side. As a result, the right and left front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L move in a state where they overlap each other (see FIG. 9C).

  Thereafter, when the detection pieces 2510k of the traversing bodies 2512R, 2512L, 2514R, and 2514L are detected by the corresponding open position sensors 2810, 2811, 2812, and 2813, the respective drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 are turned on. Stop. As a result, the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L move outward from the frame (viewable area A1) of the center accessory 1400 and do not overlap the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 (not visible). Area A2), that is, a state in which a plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are opened, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed (opened) to the player side (FIG. 4D). See).

  Incidentally, as an operation of each traversing body 2510 in which the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is closed from the traversing body 2510 to a fully opened state, in addition to the example shown in FIG. The operation shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110, first, the front of the liquid crystal display device 640 is closed by four traversing bodies 2510 (refer to FIG. 110A). The drive motors 2614, 2654, 2714, and 2754 are driven to rotate in appropriate directions, the right front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are moved rightward, and the left front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body left 2514L are moved. The left and right directions are moved substantially simultaneously and moved so that the traversing body 2510 opens left and right from the center in the left and right direction (see (a) in the figure). First, when the detection pieces 2510k of the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L are detected by the front right open position sensor 2810 and the front left open position sensor 2811, respectively, the front right drive motor 2614 and the front left drive motor 2654 are stopped. (See (c) in the figure). Thereafter, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are further moved, and when the detection pieces 2510k of the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are detected by the rear right open position sensor 2812 and the rear left open position sensor 2813, respectively, the rear left drive motor 2714 Then, the rear right drive motor 2754 is stopped (see (D) in the figure). As a result, the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are moved from the frame of the center accessory 1400 to the outside so that the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are opened, and the display of the liquid crystal display device 640 is performed. The screen can be completely exposed to the player side.

  Although illustration is omitted, a state in which the liquid crystal display device 640 is exposed (a state in which the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are opened) to a state in which the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the traversing body 2510 (a state in which the plurality of traversing bodies 2510 are closed). In this case, first, the traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L may start traversing to the closed position, and then the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L may start traversing to the closed position. The body 2512R, 2512L and the rear traversing body 2514R, 2514L may be started to traverse to the closed position substantially simultaneously.

  By the way, in the traversing body unit 2500 according to the present embodiment, each traversing body 2510 can traverse between the left and right invisible areas A2 and the visible area A1 independently. It is possible to traverse from the impossible area A2 to the opposite side across the center in the left-right direction in the visible area A1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, for example, when focusing on one traversing body 2510 (right rear traversing body right 2514R in the figure), the rear traversing body right 2514R (in the invisible area A1 on the right side) (See (A) in the figure) is moved leftward (see (B) and (C) in the figure), and within the left unrecognizable area A2 on the opposite side across the center in the left-right direction of the visible area A1. The rear traversing body 2514R can be moved until it comes into contact with the right end of the rear traversing body left 2514L (see FIG. 4D). Can be moved within.

  The example shown in FIG. 112 is an operation in which two traversing bodies 2510 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction move in the same direction and one traversing body 2510 attaches to and pulls out the other traversing body 2510. This is an example. In this example, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are arranged in the right invisible area A2, and the front traversing body left 25121L and the rear traversing body left 2514L are arranged in the left invisible area A2, respectively. In this state, the rear traversing body right 2514R starts moving leftward at a predetermined speed from the invisible area A2 on the right side. Then, when substantially the entire rear traversing body right 2514R enters the viewable area A1, the front traversing body right 2512R starts moving in the left direction (see FIG. 5A). At this time, the moving speed of the front traversing body right 2512R is set to be higher than the moving speed of the rear traversing body right 2514R (see FIG. 5A).

  As described above, since the moving speed of the front traversing body right 2512R is faster than that of the rear traversing body right 2514R, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body right 2512R are approximately in the front-rear direction. It becomes a state where they coincide with each other, and the traversing bodies 2514R and 2512R instantaneously overlap each other (see (c) in the figure). From this state, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body right 2512R move to the left, and due to the speed difference between them, the front traversing body right 2512R protrudes to the left of the rear traversing body right 2514R, The traversing body right 2512R overtakes the rear traversing body right 2514R (see FIG. 5D). After that, the front traversing body right 2512R that has overtaken the rear traversing body right 2514R comes into contact with the right end of the front traversing body left 2512L disposed in the invisible area A2 on the left side, and the movement is stopped and the rear traversing body The right 2514R arrives at the front traversing body right 2512R that has stopped first, and stops (see (v) in the figure).

  In this manner, the front traversing body right 2512R arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction can be moved so as to overtake the rear traversing body right 2514R, and one traversing body 2510 pulls out the other traversing body 2510. As a result, the player can be surprised and the movement of the traversing body 2510 can be enjoyed, and the player can have a sense of expectation, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. In this example, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are shown as examples. However, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body left 2514L may be used, or the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L and the rear traversing body may be used. The bodies 2514R and 2514L may be appropriately combined. Further, although the front traversing body 2512 is shown to overtake the rear traversing body 2514, the rear traversing body 2514 may overtake the front traversing body 2512.

  Next, the example in FIG. 113 is an example in which two traversing bodies 2510 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction move in different directions and cross. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, first, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are respectively arranged in the right invisible area A2, and the front traversing body left 25121L in the left invisible area A2. Further, the left traversing body left 2514L is arranged, and each traversing body 2510 is opened to the left and right so that the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed (see FIG. 5A). In this state, the front traversing body left 2512L in the left invisible area A2 starts moving to the right, and the rear traversing body right 2514R in the right invisible area A2 starts to move to the left (at substantially the same speed). (See Figure (a)).

  Then, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R substantially overlap each other in the front-rear direction at the substantially center in the left-right direction in the viewable area A1, and then the front traversing is performed. The body left 2512L further moves to the right side, and the rear traversing body right 2514R further moves to the left side, and shifts from the overlapped state to the separated state (see FIG. 4D). Thereafter, the movement stops so that the front traversing body left 2512L is in contact with the left end of the front traversing body right 2512R disposed in the right invisible area A2, and the rear traversing body right 2514R is moved to the left invisible area A2. The movement stops so as to come into contact with the right end of the traversing body left 2514L (see (v) in the figure).

  In this manner, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction can be operated to cross each other within the viewable area A1, and are separated from each other in the left-right direction. By crossing the one traversing body 2510 and the other traversing body 2510, a dynamic motion can be imparted to the traversing body 2510, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Next, the example of FIG. 114 is an example of movement different from that of FIG. 109 and FIG. 110 described above in the operation of covering (closing) the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 with the four traversing bodies 2510. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 114A, the rear traversing body right 2514R from the right invisible area A2 is arranged in the left invisible area A2 in the visible area A1. It is in a state where it is substantially in contact with the right end of the body left 2514L (the same state as FIG. 111 (d)). When a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 30 seconds) elapses from this state, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L start to move to the right at the same speed, and the rear traversing body When the left frame of the left 2514L substantially coincides with the right frame of the front traversing body left 2512L in the front-rear direction, the movement is stopped (see FIG. 5A). With this movement, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L move as if they were attached to each other, and the rear traversing body right 2514R is pushed out by the rear traversing body left 2514L, or The movement is such that the rear traversing body right 2514R pulls out the rear traversing body left 2514L. Further, as shown in the drawing, the left half of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered with the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L.

  Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds to 30 seconds) elapses from the above state, a rear traversing body right 2514R, a rear traversing body left 2514L, and a front traversing body left 2512L are respectively displayed. At the same time, it starts to move to the right at the same speed, and when the position where the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L contact each other reaches the approximate center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, the movement stops, and the liquid crystal display device 640 Approximately 3/4 of the front surface of the front is covered with the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L and the front traversing body left 2512L (see FIG. 5C). Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds to 30 seconds) elapses from this state, the front traversing body right 2512R arranged in the invisible region A2 on the right side starts moving in the left direction, and the front traversing body When the left frame of the right 2512R is substantially coincident with the right frame of the rear traversing body right 2514R stopped in the viewable area A1, the movement of the front traversing body right 2512R is stopped, and the four traversing bodies 2510 cause the liquid crystal display device 640 to move. The front surface is covered (closed) (see FIG. 4D).

  114. By performing a series of operations as shown in FIG. 114, it is possible to perform a staging operation in which the traversing body 2510 covers the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 step by step. This makes it possible for a player to have a sense of expectation for a game and to enhance his expectation.

  The next example of FIG. 115 is an example of a different movement from the above-described example in the operation of covering (closing) the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 with four traversing bodies 2510. In this example, the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are in the right invisible area A2, and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear in the left invisible area A2. From the state in which the traversing body left 2514L is disposed (see (A) in the figure), the rear traversing body right 2514R starts to move leftward (see (A) in the figure). Then, when the rear traversing body right 2514R reaches a position where it substantially contacts the right end of the rear traversing body left 2514L disposed in the left invisible area A2, the movement stops, and the rear traversing body right 2514R It will be in the state arrange | positioned at the left end of visually recognizable area | region A1 (refer the same figure (c)). This state is the same as the state shown in FIGS. 111 (D) and 114 (A).

  From this state, this time, the front traversing body left 2512L arranged in the invisible area A2 on the left side starts to move rightward so as to cross the front side of the rear traversing body right 2514R (see FIG. See), when the right end of the front traversing body left 2512L reaches a position that is substantially in contact with the left end of the front traversing body right 2512R arranged in the invisible area A2 on the right side, the movement stops and the front traversing body left 2512L will be in the state arrange | positioned at the right end of visual recognition area | region A1 (refer the same figure (e)). That is, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body left 2512L are arranged at the left end of the viewable area A1 and the right end of the viewable area A1, respectively, which is the same state as in FIG. In the above-described operation, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body left 2512L are moved with time, but are moved at the same time and crossed substantially at the center as in the example of FIG. You may do it.

  Then, from the state in which the rear traversing body right 2514R and the front traversing body left 2512L are arranged at the left and right ends of the visible area A1, the rear traversing body right 2514R and the rear traversing body left 2514L are simultaneously moved to the right at the same speed. When the right end of the rear traversing body right 2514R reaches the center in the left-right direction of the visually recognizable area A1, the respective movements are stopped (see (f) in the figure). Thereafter, the front traversing body left 2512L and the front traversing body right 2512R are simultaneously moved to the left at the same speed, and the left end of the front traversing body left 2512L reaches approximately the center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, and the left frame Is substantially coincident with the right frame of the rear traversing body right 2514R, the respective movements are stopped, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely covered (closed) by the four traversing bodies 2510 (see FIG. )).

  In this example, the movements in (e) to (g) in the figure are such that two traversing bodies 2510 appear to cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640, as in the example of FIG. 114 described above. As the traversing body 2510 appears one by one and the movement of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 in a stepwise manner, it is possible to express a larger movement, which makes the player more entertaining. Yes. In this example, unlike the examples in FIGS. 109 and 114 described above, as shown in the figure, two back traversing bodies 2514 are arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, and two The two front traversing bodies 2512 are arranged on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the viewable area A1, and the state of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is clearly different, which is special to the player. It can be made to recognize that it is in a state.

  The following example of FIG. 116 is an example of an operation for completely exposing the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 from the state of FIG. As shown in FIG. 116A, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are arranged on the left side in the viewable area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2152R and 2512L are arranged on the right side, respectively, so that the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely covered. In this state, the front traversing body right 2512R and the rear traversing body right 2514R are simultaneously started to move in the right direction at substantially the same speed, and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body left 2514L are approximately Start moving to the left simultaneously at the same speed (see (a) in the figure). By this movement, the front traversing body right 2512R enters the right invisible area A2, the rear traversing body left 2514L enters the left invisible area A2, and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R. Move in the front-rear direction substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the visible area A1.

  Then, when the rear traversing body 2514L that moves to the left and the front traversing body right 2512R that moves to the right move into the left and right invisible areas A2, the movement of the respective traversing bodies 2514L and 2512R stops. . On the other hand, the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear traversing body right 2514R, which overlap at substantially the center of the viewable area A1, move the front traversing body left 2512L further to the left and the rear traversing body right 2514R further to the right. (Refer to (c) in the same figure), and gradually shift from the partially overlapped state (see (D) in the same figure). Thereafter, the front traversing body left 2512L enters the left invisible area A2 and the rear traversing body right 2514R enters the right invisible area A2, respectively (see (e) in the figure), and the front traversing body left 2512L and the rear When the traversing body right 2514R moves into the left and right invisible areas A2, the movement of the traversing bodies 2512L and 2514R stops, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed (opened). (See (f) in the figure).

  In this example, the two front lateral bodies 2512L and 2514R are separated from each other after crossing, so that the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely exposed. The movement is completely different from the movement in the example in which each traversing body 2510 is divided to the left and right at the approximate center in the left and right direction of the area A1, so that the player's attention can be strongly attracted and entertained. It has become. In this example, first, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are arranged on the left side in the viewable area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2152R and 2512L are arranged on the right side to completely cover the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640. However, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L may be disposed from the center to the right side, and the front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L may be disposed from the center to the left side.

  Next, the example of FIG. 117 is an example of the movement of each traversing body different from the above-described example in a state where the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is covered. In this example, similarly to the above-described FIG. 109A and the like, the two rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are arranged at substantially the center of the viewable area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2512L are arranged to the left and right of the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L. , 2512R, and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 is completely covered (see FIG. 5A). In this state, as shown in the figure, the four traversing bodies 2510 are arranged so as to be substantially in contact with each other in the left-right direction, and in this state, the four traversing bodies 2510 are simultaneously moved in the same direction at substantially the same speed (same as above). (See Figure (a) or (c)). Accordingly, the four traversing bodies 2510 arranged in the left-right direction are aligned and moved in the same direction, so that the player can be surprised. Further, only the left end of the liquid crystal display device 640 whose front surface is covered can be exposed, or only the right end can be exposed.

  The example of FIG. 118 is an example of movement in a state where two traversing bodies 2510 are substantially in contact with each other, and here, a description will be given in a state where the two back traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are in contact with each other. In FIG. 6A, the left lateral body left 2514L and the rear lateral body right 2514R move from the left and right invisible areas A2 to the right and left, respectively, at the substantially horizontal center of the visible area A1, respectively. In this state, the rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are stopped so as to be in contact with each other. From this state, the two rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are simultaneously moved in the same direction at substantially the same speed (see FIG. See c)). As a result, the two traversing bodies 2510 stick together and move, and the traversing body 2510 whose appearance has increased by sticking moves in the left-right direction, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It has become.

  The two traversing bodies 2510 attached may be moved in the left-right direction only in the viewable area A1, or may be moved in the left-right direction so that at least a part enters the invisible area A2. You may do it. Further, in this example, two traversing bodies 2510 using two rear traversing bodies 2514R and 2514L are shown, but two front traversing bodies 2512R and 2512L may be used, or the front traversing body 2512 and the rear traversing body 2510 may be used. One body 2514 may be used at a time.

  Further, the example of FIG. 119 is an example of the arrangement of the traversing bodies 2510 in the viewable area A1, and in this example, the left and right front traversing bodies 2512L and 2512R are arranged near both left and right ends in the viewable area A1, respectively. In addition, the rear traversing body right 2514R disposed in the invisible area A2 on the right side is disposed at the substantially center of the visible area A1, and the front traversing bodies 2512L and 2512R and the rear traversing are performed. Each traversing body 2510 is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the body right 2514R and the left-right direction (see FIG. 5C). In this example, most of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 640 can be covered by the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R, and 2514R arranged in the viewable area A1, and the three traversing bodies. The rear liquid crystal display device 640 faces the gap between 2512L, 2512R, and 2514R. Although not shown in detail, the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 640 are arranged so that the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R, 2514R and the three operation buttons 330 are associated with each other. , 2514R are displayed at respective positions corresponding to predetermined guidance, so that the guidance is displayed on the three traversing bodies 2512L, 2512R, 2514R, and the three operation buttons 330 are displayed. It is possible to prompt one of the operations.

  Although detailed illustration and description are omitted, when the moving effect of the traversing body 2510 shown in FIGS. 109 to 119 described above is given, the liquid crystal display device 640 is subjected to a predetermined motion in accordance with the movement of the traversing moving body 5210. An effect image is displayed, and not only the movement of the traversing body 2510 but also the effect image displayed together with the movement of the traversing body 2510 can entertain the player.

<Game contents>
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be specifically described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the storage unit 381 of the dish unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the operation handle unit 461 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game with a game ball is started by being driven into an upper portion of a game area 605 disposed on the front surface of the game panel 599. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down in the game area 605 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 1400 depending on the driving strength. Note that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461, and the game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 599 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When a game ball driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 1400 flows down from the left and right sides to the guide shelf 1416 of the center accessory 1400, the guide shelf 1416 moves to the left area of the center accessory 1400. It is induced. When the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 enters the gate entrance 1404 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 1400 and is detected by the gate sensor 3012, the main control board is based on the detection signal. At 1350, a normal random number is generated as a normal lottery result. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1806 in the status indicator 1800 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1806 made of one LED emits light alternately in red and green) A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a lapse of time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red or green light). The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern selection table.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1806 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol display 1806 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 1508 that close the second start port 1506 expands for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 1506.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 1508 at the second start port 1506 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. When “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern can be easily changed by replacing the table with a different table and selecting it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, on the upper side of the center accessory 1400, an area where a game ball can flow is provided from the center to the left side in the left-right direction, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 605. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 1400 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate entrance 1404 or the warp entrance 1410. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Therefore, the player plays the game by appropriately adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 461 so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 1400 to the left side. It is possible to prevent the game from being reduced by reducing the game operation such that the player is strongly driven and entertaining the game by operating the operation handle portion 461 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 3012 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1806 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is determined, the ordinary random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 3012 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as a reserved number) is displayed on a normal symbol storage number display 1812. This normal symbol memory number display 1812 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four Memorize and display. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 3012 is discarded.

  In addition, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 605 and has flowed down the left side of the center bonus 1400 is played below the center bonus 1400 by the guide shelf 1602 of the side member 1600 and the guide piece 1514 of the attacker unit 1500. It comes to be brought to the center side of. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 1502 arranged below the center bonus 1400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2110, the main control board 1350 pays out a payout control board 1186 based on the detection signal. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 in accordance with the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are stored in the storage unit 381. To be paid out.

  Note that the game ball that is driven into the game area 605 does not win any of the general winning opening 1502, the first starting opening 1504, the second starting opening 1506, the stage starting opening 2220, and the big winning opening 1510. The game area 605 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 606 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 1502, the first starting port 1504, the second starting port 1506, or the big winning port 1510, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 605. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  On the other hand, when a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 1400 enters the warp inlet 1410 that opens to the left side surface of the center accessory 1400, the first backside roll in the stage member 2200 of the back unit 2000 is performed via the warp passage 1414. It is supplied to the moving surface 2202. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first back-side rolling surface 2202 rolls on the first back-side rolling surface 2202 in the left-right direction, and is discharged forward from the recess 2202b, so that the second back-side rolling surface. 2204 is supplied. The game ball also rolls in the left-right direction on the second back-side rolling surface 2204 and is released onto the front accessory-side rolling surface 1402 from the recess 2204b. When the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 enters the stage start port 2220 disposed on the rear side from the central recess 2202c on the first back-side rolling surface 2202, and enters the stage start port sensor 2114, the main ball A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381 via the control board 1350 and the like.

  When the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 is not received in the variable receiving port 2220, the game ball is moved onto the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 of the center accessory 1400 disposed on the front side of the second back-side rolling surface 2204. After being supplied and rolled on the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 in the left-right direction, it is discharged from the recess 1402b into the game area 605. The concave portion 1402b of the accessory-side rolling portion 1402 is disposed immediately above (on the upper side of) the first starting port 1504, and a game ball released from the concave portion 1402b is highly likely to reach the first starting port 1504. It is supposed to be accepted. Therefore, even when the game ball supplied to the stage member 2200 is not received into the stage start port 2220, it is received from the recess 1402b of the accessory-side rolling unit 1402 and is received into the first start port 1504. There is a possibility, it is possible to keep the sense of expectation for acceptance and suppress the decline of interest. When a game ball is received by the first start port 1504 and detected by the first start port sensor 2112, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball unit 800 via the main control board 1350 and the like. Is paid out to the storage unit 381.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the big winning port 1510 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the concave portion 1402b of the accessory-side rolling surface 1402 is provided. The game ball released from the first start port 1504 or the like is received with high probability, and when the second start port 1506 or the big prize opening 1510 can be received, the game ball is released into the release port 1420 or the recess. Since it is highly likely that it will be accepted when released from 1402b, not only the first start opening 1504 but also the second start opening 1506 and the big prize opening 1510 are expected to have an expectation regarding the acceptance of the game balls. It can be raised.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate entrance 1404 and is detected by the gate sensor 3012 and “normal hit” is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, a pair of movable pieces that close the second start port 1506 When the game ball is received by the second start port 1506 and detected by the second start port sensor 1522 when 1508 is expanded for a predetermined time and can be won, the main control board 1350 and the like are Accordingly, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  On the main control board 1350, a game ball wins the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the stage start port 2220, and the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, the stage start port. When detected by the sensor 2114, the first start port 1504 and the stage start port 2220 generate and extract a predetermined first special random number, and the second start port 1506 generates and extract a predetermined second special random number. Is called. Then, based on the extracted special random number, the CPU 3002 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to win, and is displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1802 or second special symbol display 1804 of the status indicator 1800. After the special symbol variation display is started, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the extracted special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result. In addition, the display of the variation of the special symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 is started in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804. The decorative symbol corresponding to the special lottery result is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the stop display.

  Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special symbol display corresponding to the special random number (the first special symbol corresponding to the first special random number) of the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804. A special symbol specific display result (also referred to as a jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed on the display 1802 and a second special symbol indicator 1804 corresponding to the second special random number, and a decorative symbol specific display result (a jackpot symbol) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. (Also referred to as a symbol) is stopped.

  In the case of a small hit, the special symbol display corresponding to the special random number (the first special symbol display corresponding to the first special random number) of the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804. 1802, a special symbol special display result (also referred to as a small hit symbol) is stopped on the second special symbol indicator 1804 corresponding to the second special random number, and a special symbol special display result (small hit) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. (Also referred to as a symbol) is stopped.

  In the case of detachment, a special symbol display corresponding to a special random number (first special symbol display 1802 corresponding to the first special random number, among the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804). The second special symbol display unit 1804 corresponding to the second special random number stops displaying the special symbol (also referred to as an off symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result, and the specific display result and the special display are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. A decorative design (also called a detached design) different from the result is stopped and displayed. Thus, the display result of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 and the display result of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 640 correspond to each other.

  The decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are different from the special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1802 and the second special symbol indicator 1804. The contents of the variable display performed on the special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 are displayed to the player with the effect being further enhanced by using the decorative symbol for effect. In other words, when the specific display result is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, it shifts to a special advantageous gaming state (15R big hit gaming state, 5R big hit gaming state, 2R big hit gaming state). Even if the specific display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, the special symbol different from the specific display result is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804. If it is, the transition control to the big hit gaming state is not performed. The same applies to the special display result.

  In addition, the specific display result that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804 and the specific display result that is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 in the case of a big hit depends on the type of the big hit. Are provided. When the high profit special display result of the special symbol (also referred to as 15R probability variable big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, the decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. The high profit special display result (also referred to as a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the 15R jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, after the 15R jackpot gaming state is finished, a high probability state (for example, normal (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a big hit is higher than normal (low probability short state, normal state (also referred to as low probability non-short state))). (Low probability short-time state, normal state (also called low-probability non-time-short state))) is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 1/400, and high probability state is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 1/40) To control.

  Further, when the high profit non-special display result (also referred to as 15R non-probable big hit symbol) of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, the liquid crystal display device 640 is decorated. The high profit non-special display result (also referred to as a 15R non-probable big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the game is controlled to the 15R big hit gaming state. In addition, after the 15R jackpot gaming state is finished, the special symbol change display is performed until the special symbol change display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804. From the normal state to the display time of the special symbol on the normal symbol display 1806 and the time to display the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1806 Control to short state when shortening.

  In addition, when the special symbol medium profit special display result (also referred to as 5R probability variable big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, the decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. The medium profit special display result (also referred to as a 5R probability variable jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the 5R jackpot gaming state is controlled. In addition, after the 5R big hit gaming state, the high probability state is controlled. In addition, when the first special symbol display unit 1802 and the second special symbol display unit 1804 stop and display the medium symbol non-special display result (also referred to as 5R non-probable big hit symbol) of the special symbol, the liquid crystal display device 640 is decorated. The medium profit non-special display result (also referred to as 5R non-probable big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the game is controlled to the 5R big hit gaming state. In addition, after the 5R big hit gaming state is finished, the time-short state or the normal state is controlled.

  In addition, when the low profit special display result (also referred to as 2R probability variation big hit symbol) of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, the decoration symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. The low profit special display result (also referred to as 2R probability variable jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed to control the 2R jackpot gaming state. In addition, after the 2R big hit gaming state, the high probability state is controlled. Further, when the low profit non-special display result (also referred to as 2R non-probable big hit symbol) of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1802 and the second special symbol display 1804, the liquid crystal display device 640 is decorated. The low profit non-special display result of the symbol (also referred to as 2R non-probable big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed, and the 2R big hit gaming state is controlled. In addition, after the 2R big hit gaming state is finished, it is controlled to the above short time state or normal state. In the high probability state, the control for the short time state is also executed simultaneously.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 1802 or the second special symbol display 1804 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing piece 1512 of the attacker unit 1500 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game state (15R big hit game state, 5R big hit game state, 2R big hit game state)) is generated, and more game balls are awarded by winning a game ball to the big prize opening 1510 during that time. Can be earned. When one game ball wins the big prize opening 1510, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to the storage unit 381.

  The first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the stage start port 2220 also display the first special symbol display 1802 and the second symbol as well as the normal symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the gate entrance 1404. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the two special symbol indicators 1804 or the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the start opening 1504, 1506, 2220. The first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, and the stage start port sensor 2114 detect the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port until the special symbol variation display becomes possible. The first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection signals from the sensor 1522 and the stage start port sensor 2114 are stored. Shown adapted to hold, it has a number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the first special symbol memory number indicator 1808 or the second special symbol memory number display 1810. Each of the first special symbol memory number display 1808 and the second special symbol memory number display 1810 is composed of two LEDs, and suggests the memory number by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 1350, the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 2112, the second start port sensor 1522, and the stage start port sensor 2114 and the special random number of the second special random number are stored in advance. By comparing with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) that has been determined, it is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit”, or “big hit” As for “big hit”, it is also determined whether it is “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, or “15R big hit”. In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “short hit per probability change”, “probability per hit”, “short hit per hour”, “short per hit during probability change”, and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 1504, the second start port 1506, and the stage start port 2220 (the special lottery result) In the case of “small hit”, the main control board 1350 opens and closes the open / close piece 1512 of the attacker unit 1500 in an open state for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). Is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

  On the other hand, if the extracted first special random number or second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 1350 opens the open / close piece 1512 of the attacker unit 1500 for a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds). ) Or an open / close pattern that closes the open / close piece 1512 when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls satisfy any of the conditions for winning the prize winning opening 1510, one round of the open / close pattern Are repeated a predetermined number of times (the number of predetermined rounds), 2 rounds for “2R big hit”, 5 rounds for “5R big hit”, 15 rounds for “15R big hit”, respectively. Repeatedly, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Note that, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, with regard to “big hit”, the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time / short table or the like according to the extracted special random number.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game ball to the first start opening 1504, the stage start opening 2220, and the second start opening 1506 are used. Accordingly, according to the special lottery result, the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 of the status indicator 1800 are variably displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 640 also has a special random number (special An effect image corresponding to the lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, on the liquid crystal display device 640, the display of variation of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially stopped. When all the symbol sequences are finally displayed in a stopped state, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols displayed in a stopped state is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol displays 1808 and 1810, the player is generally displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. Pay attention to the design.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) As a special lottery result on which this “reach effect image” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. Further, the liquid crystal display device 640 can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game.

  Note that the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 1808 and the second special symbol display 1810 is directly controlled by the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 103). The variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 640 is controlled by the peripheral control board 3100 and the liquid crystal display control board 3112 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 3100. It has become. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 640 that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control board 3100 or the like, so that a certain one related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 1350 is controlled. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command to increase the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 640. In addition, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game is controlled by the peripheral control board 3100 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 1350 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and hard to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  Note that the traversing body 2510 (front traversing body 2512, rear traversing body 2514) in the present embodiment is a movable body of the present invention, and the upper front rail 2520a, upper rear rail 2520b, and lower rail unit 2800 of the present embodiment are present. Each corresponds to the guide member of the invention. Further, the front lower drive unit 2610, the front upper drive unit 2650, the rear lower drive unit 2710, and the rear upper drive unit 2750 in the present embodiment correspond to the movable body drive means of the present invention. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 3100 in the present embodiment is configured to implement the movement control means of the present invention by executing a predetermined program.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front-rear direction is within the viewable area A1 that is visible from the player side according to the game situation of the game ball driven into the game area 605 by the player. After the at least two traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 arranged at different positions move in different directions and are separated from each other or substantially in contact with each other, they are separated or substantially in contact with each other. Dynamic movements that could not be achieved with a movable body in a conventional pachinko machine, because the movement of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 can be made to cross each other. Makes it possible to surprise and entertain the player, and to make the types of moving effects of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 more diverse. Rukoto can, and hardly tired movement of the transverse member 2512,2514 is interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since at least two traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 are in a state where they are separated or substantially in contact with each other after being separated or substantially in contact with each other, they are separated or substantially in contact with each other. The number and size of 2512 and 2514 appear to decrease, and when the overlapping traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 are separated or substantially in contact with each other, the number and size of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 increase. It is possible to make the illusion that the number and size of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 have changed, and to make the movements of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 more enjoyable and to suppress the interest in the game from decreasing. can do.

  Further, as described above, at least two traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction move so as to cross each other, and when they overlap each other in the front-rear direction, Since the traversing body 2514 is hidden by the front traversing body 2512 on the front side, the rear traversing body 2514 on the rear side is visible and hidden, so that the player can be strongly attracted interest in the rear traversing body 2514. It is possible to increase the player's expectation and to enjoy the movement of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514, thereby suppressing the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, a series of operations in which the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction are separated from or substantially in contact with each other and then are separated from each other or substantially in contact with each other after being overlapped in the front-rear direction. Since each of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 overlaps with each other in the front-rear direction, the moving direction of the traversing bodies 2512 and 2514 does not change suddenly. It is possible to prevent the inertial force in the direction opposite to the moving direction from acting on the body 2512, 2514, and suppress the movement of the traversing body 2512, 2514 due to the inertial force and unnatural movement. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least two traversing bodies 2510 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction are separated or substantially in contact with each other while moving in the same direction within the viewable area A1. After overlapping from the state, the movement is made to be separated or substantially in contact with each other. After the traversing bodies 2510 separated or substantially in contact with each other catch up with one traversing body 2510, one traversing body 2510 Since the other traversing body 2510 moves away, the other traversing body 2510, which could not be achieved with a movable body (corresponding to the traversing body) in a conventional pachinko machine, The movement that overtakes the traversing body 2510 can surprise the player, make the opportunity come, and increase expectation. It can be a 2510 movable rendition of more diverse things, player's interest and hardly tired may be pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing a decrease.

  In addition, after the at least two traversing bodies 2510 arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction reach the one traversing body 2510, the one traversing body 2510 accelerates. Thus, the other traversing body 2510 can be moved away again, and the one traversing body 2510 that catches up moves so as to roll back the other traversing body 2510. Decreasing the expectation by wearing it, it becomes possible to raise the expectation again by rewinding, and it can entertain the player as a movable production with inflection, suppressing the interest in the game from falling can do.

  Further, since each traversing body 2510 is moved between the visible area A1 and the invisible area A2, the traversing body 2510 is moved from the invisible area A2 to the visible area A1, or the traversing body 2510 is moved. Can be moved from the visually recognizable area A1 to the invisible area A2 to make the traversing body 2510 visible or invisible from the player side. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can suppress the player's interest from decreasing due to difficulty in getting bored can be obtained.

  Further, since the traversing body 2510 can be moved from the left or right invisible area A2 to the opposite side beyond the center of the visible area A1, the traversing body 2510 has a moving range. It becomes larger, and it becomes possible to perform the overtaking operation of the traversing bodies 2510 using substantially the entire visible area A1, and it is possible to perform a moving effect of a more dynamic movement, which surprises and delights the player. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  In addition, since the size of the viewable area A1 is set within a range that is smaller than the width of the game panel 600 in the left-right direction and larger than half of the width of the game area 605, the viewable area A1 is appropriately set with respect to the game area 605. The viewable area A1 is less noticeable in the game area 605, and the size of the traversing body 2510 that moves in the viewable area A1 is relatively small, and the traversing body 2510 is less noticeable. It is possible to prevent the movable performance from being fully enjoyed.

  Further, since the traversing body 2510 is guided in the left-right direction by the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b arranged in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the game panel 600, the traversing body 2510 is different in the front-rear direction. It can arrange | position and move to the left-right direction, and can show | play the effect mentioned above reliably. Further, since the length of the upper front rail 2520a and the upper rear rail 2520b is substantially the same as the width of the game panel 600, the moving range of the traversing body 2510 can be made as wide as possible, and the traversing body 2510 It is possible to make a more dynamic movement by guiding the player in a wide range, and to make the movement of the traversing body 2510 entertain the player and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing, and to move the traversing body moving greatly The pachinko machine 2510 can make the traversing body 2510 and the game area 605 in which the traversing body 2510 are arranged stand out, and can give the player an impression different from other pachinko machines at a glance and strongly attract the player's attention. Machine 1 can be used.

  In addition, the horizontal width of the traversing body 2510 is set to a width of about 1/4 that is within a range of 1/2 to 1/10 with respect to the horizontal width of the viewable area A1. Since the entire traversing body 2510 can be clearly seen in the viewable area A1, the traversing body 2510 can be easily viewed, and the movement of the traversing body 2510 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can do. In addition, since the size of the traversing body 2510 can be set to an appropriate size with respect to the size of the viewable area A1, various moving effects by the traversing body 2510 described above can be realized with certainty. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and the player's interest to decline.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  The claims that can be grasped from the above embodiment and technical ideas other than the claims will be described below together with the effects thereof.

(Solution 1)
Multiple types of symbol information (special symbols) fluctuate based on the establishment of predetermined starting conditions (accepting game balls to the first start port 1504 and the stage start port 2220, accepting game balls to the second start port 1506) A display device (first special symbol display 1802, second special symbol display 1804) for displaying and displaying the display result;
Profit grant determination means (mounted on the main control board 1350) for determining whether or not to control to a profit grant state (special advantageous game state) for giving a predetermined profit (prize ball) to the player based on the establishment of the start condition. The CPU 3002 to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on a special random number),
In a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) that derives and displays a specific display result (special display result of a special symbol) on the display device when it is determined that the profit grant determination unit controls the profit grant state.
Game control means (main control unit) that includes the profit grant determination unit and controls the progress of the game including display control of the display device and transmits a control command according to the progress state according to the determination result of the profit grant determination unit. CPU 3002) mounted on control board 1350,
In response to a control command from the game control means, a plurality of types of light emitting members (LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, 2010, and 2012) installed in the gaming machine are displayed in the display contents of the display device. Production control means (CPU 3102 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100) for controlling the production of the game including the control to emit light in association,
The production control means includes
The control process (main process (32 ms steady process)) for controlling the effect of the game is executed periodically (every 32 ms),
When controlling light emission of a specific light-emitting member (LED mounted on the stage decoration substrate 2012) among the plurality of types of light-emitting members in accordance with a control process for controlling the effect of the game, the specific light-emitting member The specific light emitting member is directly controlled by outputting a drive signal to the control unit, and the control signal is output to the specific light emitting member and the control process for controlling the effect of the game is executed. Update at intervals less than or equal to
Non-specific light-emitting members other than the specific light-emitting members (LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 3126, 1424b, 3130, and 2010) among the plurality of types of light-emitting members according to the control process for controlling the effect of the game ) Is controlled by transmitting a light emission command indicating a light emission mode to a light emission control means (gradation control IC 3200b mounted on the lamp driving substrate 3200) for controlling light emission of the non-specific light emitting member. Indirectly controlling the non-specific light emitting member by causing the control means to output a drive signal to the non-specific light emitting member,
In order to update the drive signal output to the specific light emitting member at an interval equal to or shorter than an execution interval of a control process for controlling the game effect (an interval of 32 ms or less) and to control the game effect When the control process is not executed (remaining time of the main process), the light emission control state of the non-specific light emitting member by the light emission control means is determined (inspecting each control register of the control register group 3200bs) If the light emission control state is different from the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command, the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command is corrected (abnormal data (door frame in each control register of the control register group 3200bs)). Side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, gradation lighting command, and application start command. Characterized in rewrite) the normal data if it is different data) stored in the pattern.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, a plurality of types of light-emitting members are emitted in association with the display contents of the display device that variably displays a plurality of types of symbol information and derives and displays a display result based on the establishment of the start condition. In order to control, the display effect can be enhanced and the symbol information can be variably displayed on the display device. In addition to the game control means for controlling the progress of the game, the effect control means for controlling the effect of the game including the control of a plurality of types of light emitting members is provided, so that the processing burden on the game control means can be reduced.
Furthermore, when a plurality of light emitting members are classified into a specific light emitting member and a non-specific light emitting member, and a specific light emitting member is controlled to emit light according to a control process for controlling the game effect, When the non-specific light-emitting member is controlled to emit light according to the control process for controlling the light-emitting member directly by the effect control means and controlling the game effect, the non-specific light-emitting member is indirectly controlled by the effect control means. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately control a plurality of light emitting members according to their classification, for example, to directly control a specific light emitting member having a specific meaning, thereby preventing erroneous lighting due to generation of noise or the like. Thus, the reliability can be improved, and the decrease in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.
Further, the effect control means periodically executes control processing for controlling the game effect, and outputs to a specific light emitting member at an interval equal to or less than the execution interval of the control process for controlling the game effect. In order to update the drive signal, for example, even when a specific light-emitting member having a specific meaning is erroneously turned on due to noise or the like, it can be quickly corrected to a normal light emission mode. Thereby, the reliability of the light emission by a specific light emitting member can be improved, and the fall of game entertainment can be suppressed.
Also, when the effect control means is not executing the control process for controlling the game effect, the light emission control state of the non-specific light emitting member is determined and the light emission control state is different from the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command Is corrected to the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command, so that erroneous lighting due to generation of noise or the like can be suppressed. Moreover, since it is possible to improve not only the specific light emitting member having a specific meaning but also the reliability of a non-specific light emitting member not having a specific meaning, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

(Solution 2)
The effect control means, when it is determined that the profit grant determination means controls to the profit grant state based on establishment of the start condition, the profit grant state before the specific display result is derived and displayed on the display device Confirmation notification determining means for determining whether or not to notify the player that the control is to be performed (notifying that the CPU 3102 mounted on the peripheral control board 3100 performs a lottery or the like using random numbers and becomes a big hit A portion for determining whether or not to perform the determination, and when the determination notification determination unit determines that the determination notification is to be made, the specific light-emitting member is determined in advance in the specific mode (display unit 1426d is “Moon Moon”). The gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein the light emission is controlled in such a manner that the LED mounted on the stage decoration board 2012 is appropriately turned on so that the symbol of the above is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution means 2, when it is determined that the notification is confirmed when the profit grant determination means determines to control the profit grant state based on the establishment of the start condition, the specific display result is derived on the display device. By controlling the light emission of a specific light-emitting member in a specific manner determined in advance before it is displayed, a notice of confirmation is sent to the player that the profit-giving state is controlled. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games. In addition, since the specific notification is performed by controlling the light emission of a specific light emitting member having high light emission reliability, the specific light emitting member is erroneously lit even though it is not determined to be controlled to the profit granting state. Decrease can be prevented.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine according to Solution 1 or Solution 2, wherein the light emission control means outputs the drive signal to the specific light emitting member via an open collector transistor (transistor 3200a).

  According to the gaming machine described in Solution 3, since a drive signal is output to a specific light emitting member through a transistor having an open collector configuration that is resistant to noise, erroneous lighting can be suppressed and reliability can be improved. It is possible to prevent a decline in the entertainment interest. Moreover, not only a single light emitting member but also a plurality of light emitting members can be collectively controlled as a specific light emitting member.

(Solution 4)
A game board (game board 4) in which a game area (game area 605) in which a game ball that has been driven can flow down is formed;
A main body frame (main body frame 3) for detachably mounting the game board;
A door frame (door frame 5) provided in front of the main body frame so that the game area can be visually recognized, and decorating an outer peripheral area of the game area;
The gaming machine according to any one of Solution 1 to Solution 3, wherein the plurality of types of light emitting members are provided on the game board and the door frame.

  According to the gaming machine described in the solution means 4, a game board in which a game area in which a game ball that has been struck is formed is formed, a main body frame for detachably mounting the game board, and a game area in front of the main body frame Provided in a door frame that decorates the outer peripheral area of the game board and the gaming area of a ball game machine that is provided with a door frame that is provided so as to be visible and decorates the outer peripheral area of the gaming area. Since the plurality of types of light emitting members are controlled to emit light, the player can easily recognize the light emission mode of the light emitting members.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko gaming machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko game machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 11, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 13 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is the cross-sectional top view of the pachinko gaming machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle part, and a launch rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the vertical direction center of the pachinko game machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. (A) is a front view of a game board, (a) is a front view which expands and shows the status indicator in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. FIG. 76 is an enlarged perspective view showing the vicinity of a stage in FIG. 75. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination, the attacker unit, and the side member from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the center combination, the attacker unit, and the side member from the back. It is a side view of the center accessory seen from the direction of arrow A in FIG. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front in the state which assembled the front structural member and the game panel, (b) is the perspective view seen from the back in the state which assembled the front structural member and the game panel. It is a front view of a back unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the exploded view of FIG. 87 from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each member attached to the back unit base in a back unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the exploded perspective view of FIG. 89 viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rocking body unit from the front, (b) is the front view of the rocking body unit, (c) is the perspective view which expands and shows the rocking mechanism in the rocking body unit. . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the traversing body unit of the back unit into the front traversing body drive unit, the back traversing body drive unit, and the lower rail unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the disassembled perspective view of FIG. 92 from the back. It is a front view of a traversing body unit. It is a rear view of a traversing body unit. It is a perspective view which abbreviate | omits and shows a part of front traverse body drive unit in a traversing body unit. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front which abbreviate | omitted a part of front lower drive unit in a front traversing body drive unit, (b) abbreviate | omits a part of front lower drive unit in a front traversing body drive unit FIG. It is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted some front upper drive units in a front traversing body drive unit, and was seen from the front. It is a front view of a back traversing body drive unit. It is a rear view which abbreviate | omits and shows a part of back traversing body drive unit. It is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted a part of back lower drive unit in a back traversing body drive unit, and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which abbreviate | omitted a part of rear upper drive unit in a back traversing body drive unit, and was seen from the front. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure around the main board | substrate in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the periphery control board periphery in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly a part of control structure of the lamp control board periphery in a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the sub decoration body vicinity in a center accessory, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display part in a sub decoration body. It is a front view of the game board which made the traversing body fully open. It is a front view of the game board showing a state where the traversing body is fully opened and the swinging body is exposed and swung. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a movement of the traversing body from the state which the several traversing body covered the front surface of the liquid crystal display device to the exposed state (full open). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a movement of covering the front surface of the liquid crystal display device with a plurality of traversing bodies different from FIG. 109. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable range of a traversing body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the movement which any one traversing body of the front-back direction overtakes the other traversing body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motion which the traversing bodies arrange | positioned in the position which differs in the front-back direction cross. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the motion which coat | covers the front surface of a liquid crystal display device with the several traversing body different from FIG. 109 and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the further different motion which coat | covers the front surface of a liquid crystal display device with a some traversing body. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the movement of the traversing body from the state (K) of FIG. 115 until the liquid crystal display device is fully opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a movement of the traversing body in the state which coat | covered the front surface of a liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motion in the state which two traversing bodies contact | connected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a motion in which three traversing bodies are located in a line at the front surface of a liquid crystal display device.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 300 Dish unit 460 Handle device 461 Operation handle part 599 Game panel 599e Opening part 600 Panel holder 600a Holding step part 600b Through-hole 601 Front component 602 Outer rail 603 Inside Rail 605 Game area 606 Out port 610 Foul port 621 Back box 621a Front side box 621b Rear side box 640 Liquid crystal display device 1350 Main control board 2000 Back unit 2500 Traversing body unit 2510 Traversing body (movable body)
2512 Front traversing body (movable body)
2512R front traversing body right 2512L front traversing body left 2514 rear traversing body (movable body)
2514R Rear traversing body right 2514L Rear traversing body left 2520a Upper front rail (guide member)
2520b Upper rear rail (guide member)
2600 Front traversing body drive unit 2610 Front lower drive unit (movable body driving means)
2650 Front upper drive unit (movable body drive means)
2700 Rear traversing body drive unit 2710 Rear lower drive unit (movable body driving means)
2750 Rear upper drive unit (movable body drive means)
2800 Lower rail unit (guide member)
3000 Main board 3100 Peripheral control board (movement control means)
A1 viewable area A2 non-viewable area

Claims (1)

A display device that variably displays a plurality of types of symbol information based on establishment of a predetermined start condition and derives and displays a display result;
Profit grant determination means for determining whether or not to control to a profit grant state that gives a predetermined profit to the player based on establishment of the start condition,
In a gaming machine that derives and displays a specific display result on the display device when it is determined that the profit grant determination means controls the profit grant state,
Game control means including the profit grant determination means, and according to the determination result of the profit grant determination means, controls the progress of the game including display control of the display device and transmits a control command according to the progress state;
In response to a control command from the game control means, the effect control means for controlling the effects of the game including control for causing a plurality of types of light emitting members installed in the gaming machine to emit light in relation to the display content of the display device; With
The production control means includes
Periodically executing a control process for controlling the effect of the game,
When controlling light emission of a specific light-emitting member among the plurality of types of light-emitting members in accordance with a control process for controlling the effect of the game, by outputting a drive signal to the specific light-emitting member, While directly controlling a specific light emitting member, the drive signal output to the specific light emitting member is updated at an interval equal to or less than an execution interval of a control process for controlling the effect of the game,
When the non-specific light emitting member other than the specific light emitting member among the plurality of types of light emitting members is controlled to emit light according to the control process for controlling the effect of the game, the non-specific light emitting member emits light. The non-specific light-emitting member is indirectly controlled by transmitting a light-emission command instructing the light-emission mode to the light-emission control unit to be controlled and causing the light-emission control unit to output a drive signal to the non-specific light-emitting member. At the same time, when a control process for controlling the effect of the game is not executed, a light emission control state of the non-specific light emitting member by the light emission control means is determined, and the light emission control state is determined by the light emission command. A gaming machine characterized in that when it is different from the instructed light emission mode, the light emission mode instructed by the light emission command is corrected.

Images